EP2042337A1 - Lithographic printing plate precursor and method of preparing lithographic printing plate - Google Patents

Lithographic printing plate precursor and method of preparing lithographic printing plate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
EP2042337A1
EP2042337A1 EP08017055A EP08017055A EP2042337A1 EP 2042337 A1 EP2042337 A1 EP 2042337A1 EP 08017055 A EP08017055 A EP 08017055A EP 08017055 A EP08017055 A EP 08017055A EP 2042337 A1 EP2042337 A1 EP 2042337A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
group
lithographic printing
printing plate
plate precursor
compound
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP08017055A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Inventor
Hidekazu Oohashi
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of EP2042337A1 publication Critical patent/EP2042337A1/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C1/00Forme preparation
    • B41C1/10Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme
    • B41C1/1008Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme by removal or destruction of lithographic material on the lithographic support, e.g. by laser or spark ablation; by the use of materials rendered soluble or insoluble by heat exposure, e.g. by heat produced from a light to heat transforming system; by on-the-press exposure or on-the-press development, e.g. by the fountain of photolithographic materials
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C1/00Forme preparation
    • B41C1/10Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme
    • B41C1/1008Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme by removal or destruction of lithographic material on the lithographic support, e.g. by laser or spark ablation; by the use of materials rendered soluble or insoluble by heat exposure, e.g. by heat produced from a light to heat transforming system; by on-the-press exposure or on-the-press development, e.g. by the fountain of photolithographic materials
    • B41C1/1016Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme by removal or destruction of lithographic material on the lithographic support, e.g. by laser or spark ablation; by the use of materials rendered soluble or insoluble by heat exposure, e.g. by heat produced from a light to heat transforming system; by on-the-press exposure or on-the-press development, e.g. by the fountain of photolithographic materials characterised by structural details, e.g. protective layers, backcoat layers or several imaging layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/02Cover layers; Protective layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/06Backcoats; Back layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/10Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes characterised by inorganic compounds, e.g. pigments
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/12Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes characterised by non-macromolecular organic compounds
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/14Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes characterised by macromolecular organic compounds, e.g. binder, adhesives
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/04Negative working, i.e. the non-exposed (non-imaged) areas are removed
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/06Developable by an alkaline solution
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/10Developable by an acidic solution
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/22Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation characterised by organic non-macromolecular additives, e.g. dyes, UV-absorbers, plasticisers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/24Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation characterised by a macromolecular compound or binder obtained by reactions involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. acrylics, vinyl polymers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a lithographic printing plate precursor which is capable of being subjected to a so-called direct plate making, in which the plate making is directly conducted based on digital signals, for example, from a computer using various kinds of lasers, particularly, to a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which does not need alkali development, and a method of preparing a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • Typical examples thereof include firstly recording materials capable of being recorded with an infrared laser having a wavelength of not less than 760 nm, for example, positive type recording materials described in U.S.
  • Patent 4,708,925 and acid catalyst crosslinking type negative type recording materials described in JP-A-8-276558 (the term “JP-A” as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent applieation")
  • secondly recording materials responsive to an ultraviolet ray or visible light laser having a wavelength of from 300 to 700 nm for example, radical polymerization type negative type recording materials described in U.S. Patent 2,850,445 and JP-B-44-20189 (the term “JP-B” as used herein means an "examined Japanese patent publication”).
  • a step of removing the non-image area by dissolution is indispensable and a post-processing step, for example, washing the printing plate after the development processing with water, treatment of the printing plate after the development processing with a rinse solution containing a surfactant or treatment of the printing plate after the development processing with an oil-desensitizing solution containing gum arabic or a starch derivative, is also necessary.
  • a post-processing step for example, washing the printing plate after the development processing with water, treatment of the printing plate after the development processing with a rinse solution containing a surfactant or treatment of the printing plate after the development processing with an oil-desensitizing solution containing gum arabic or a starch derivative.
  • on-machine development on-press development
  • dampening water ink
  • a lithographic printing plate precursor suitable for the on-machine development is required to have an image-forming layer soluble in dampening water or an ink solvent and a bright room handling property suitable for development on a printing machine placed in a bright room.
  • a lithographic printing plate precursor having provided on a hydrophilic support an image-forming layer in which fine particles of thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer are dispersed in a hydrophilic binder polymer is proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent 2,938,397 ).
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed to an infrared laser to agglomerate (fuse) the fine particles of thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer by heat generated by light-to-heat conversion thereby forming an image, and mounted on a cylinder of a printing machine to carry out on-machine development by supplying at least any one of dampening water and ink. Since the lithographic printing plate precursor has the sensitive zone in an infrared region, it has also the handling property in a bright room.
  • the image formed by the agglomeration (fusion) of the fine particles of thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer is insufficient in strength and has a problem of printing durability as a printing plate.
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors including microcapsules containing a polymerizable compound incorporated therein in stead of the thermoplastic fine particles are also proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2000-211262 , JP-A-2001-277740 , JP-A-2002-29162 , JP-A-2002-46361 , JP-A-2002-137562 and JP-A-2002-326470 ).
  • it is advantageous that the polymer image formed by a reaction of the polymerizable compound is excellent in the strength in comparison with the image formed by the fusion of the fine particles.
  • a support having a surface of high hydrophilicity is used in order to make possible development with an aqueous solution having pH of 10 or less or dampening water (ordinarily nearly neutral) on a printing machine and as a result, the image area is apt to be removed from the support by the dampening water during printing so that sufficient printing durability can not be obtained.
  • the surface of support renders hydrophobic, ink also adheres on the non-image area during printing to cause printing stain.
  • it is extremely difficult to achieve a good balance between the printing durability and the stain resistance and a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which provides good stain resistance and sufficient printing durability has not yet been known.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a lithographic printing plate precursor capable of being subjected to a direct plate making based on digital data, for example, from a computer, by recording using a solid laser or semiconductor laser radiating an ultraviolet ray, visible light or an infrared ray, particularly, a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which can be developed with an aqueous solution having pH of 10 or less or on a printing machine and provides high printing durability and good stain resistance, and a method of preparing a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • the inventor has found that the above-described object can be achieved by using a support for lithographic printing plate precursor, a surface of which has a contact angle value of water droplet in air of 70° or more and the contact angle of water droplet in air of the surface of which can be decreased to a value of 30° or less by a treatment with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10.
  • the present invention includes the following items.
  • a lithographic printing plate precursor which is capable of being subjected to a so-called direct plate making, in which the plate making is directly conducted based on digital signals, for example, from a computer using various kinds of lasers and which provides high printing durability and excellent stain resistance, particularly, a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which does not need development with an aqueous alkali solution, and a method of preparing a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate precursor are obtained.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention comprises a photosensitive layer capable of being developed with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 provided on a support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more, and the support has on its surface a compound having a functional group X.
  • the functional group X is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, thereby decreasing the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less.
  • the support for use in the invention has a surface exhibiting a contact angle value of water droplet in air of 70° or more and a compound having a functional group X on its surface.
  • the functional group X has a feature in that it is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, thereby decreasing the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less.
  • the support having the compound (hereinafter, also referred to as a "polarity conversion compound”) having a functional group X on its surface will be specifically described below.
  • the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention is not particularly restricted as long as it is a compound having the functional group X having the above-described characteristics.
  • R1 to R3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, -OR11, -SR11, -OCOR11, -OCOOR11, -OCONR11R12, -OSO 2 R11, -OPO(OR11)(OR12), -OSiR11R12R13, -OPO(OR11)R12, -SCOR11, -NR11R12, -NR11COR12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO 2 R12, -COR11, -COOR11, -CONR11R12, -SiR11R12R13, -SO 2 R11, -SO 3 R11 or -PO(OR11)(OR12), or appropriate two of R1 to R3 may be
  • alkyl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, an undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an eucosyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, an isohexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a 2-methylhe
  • aryl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, an ethoxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, an acetoxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a phenylthiophenyl group, a methylaminophenyl group, a dimethylaminophenyl group, an acetylaminophenyl group, a carboxyphenyl group, a methoxycarbonylphenyl group,
  • alkenyl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 1-butenyl group, a cinnamyl group and a 2-chloro-1-ethenyl group.
  • alkynyl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include an ethynyl group, a 1-propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group and a trimethylsilylethynyl group.
  • R1, R2 or R3, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, -OR11, -OCOR11, -OCONR11R12, -OSO 2 R11, -NR11R12, -NR11COR12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO 2 R12, -COR11, -COOR11, -CONR11R12, -SO 2 R11 or -SO 3 R11 is preferable, and a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, -OR11, -OCOR11, -OCONR11R12, -NR11R12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13
  • the amount of the functional group represented by formula (1) is preferably from 0.01 to 50 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.05 to 25 mmol/g, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 10 mmol/g.
  • Two or more of the functional groups represented by formula (1) may be contained in the polarity conversion compound.
  • the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention may be a low molecular compound or a polymer compound and it is preferably a polymer compound.
  • the main chain of polymer compound any main chain of polymer compound conventionally known may be suitably used.
  • an acrylic resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin, a vinyl resin, a urethane resin, a urea resin, an amide resin, an ester resin, a carbonate resin, a novolac resin, an epoxy resin and an alkylene oxide resin are preferable an acrylic resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin, a vinyl resin, a urethane resin, a urea resin, an amide resin, an ester resin and a carbonate resin are more preferable, and an acrylic resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin, a vinyl resin and a urethane resin are particularly preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polarity conversion polymer compound is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more. By controlling the weight average molecular weight of the polarity conversion polymer compound to 5,000 or more, good printing durability and good stain resistance are obtained.
  • the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention further has a functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support.
  • a functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support printing durability of the image area and stain resistance in the non-image area are further improved.
  • the functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support can be appropriately selected according to the support used.
  • a functional group for example, a phosphoric acid group or a salt group thereof, a phosphonic acid group or a salt group thereof, an ammonium group, a siloxane group, a p-dicarbonyl group or a carboxylic acid group or a salt group thereof is exemplified, although a specific functional group may be varied depending on the surface treatment of the support.
  • a phosphoric acid salt group, a phosphonic acid salt group, an ammonium group, a siloxane group, a ⁇ -dicarbonyl group and a carboxylic acid salt group are preferable.
  • the functional groups may be used in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the amount of the functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support introduced into the polarity conversion compound is preferably from 0.01 to 10 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.05 to 5 mmol/g, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 3 mmol/g.
  • the polarity conversion compound further has a functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer.
  • a functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer By the introduction of the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer, printing durability is further improved.
  • the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer can be appropriately selected according to the photosensitive layer used. In the case of using the photosensitive layer of radical polymerization type, as the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer, a radical polymerizable unsaturated bond is exemplified.
  • a hydrogen-acceptable functional group involved in a hydrogen bond for example, a polyethylene oxide chain, a phenolic hydroxy group or a pyridyl group is exemplified.
  • the functional groups may be used in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the amount of the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer introduced into the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention is preferably from 0.01 to 10 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.05 to 5 mmol/g, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 3 mmol/g.
  • the polarity conversion compounds for use in the invention may be used individually or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
  • the amount of the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention on the support is preferably from 1 to 100 mg/m 2 , more preferably from 2 to 80 mg/m 2 , particularly preferably from 3 to 50 mg/m 2 . in the range described above, good printing durability and good stain resistance are obtained.
  • the preparation of the support having on its surface the polarity conversion compound can be performed in a conventional manner, for example, by a method of coating the polarity conversion compound on a support substrate or a method of immersing a support substrate in a solution containing the polarity conversion compound.
  • a method is used wherein the polarity conversion compound is dissolved or dispersed in an appropriate solvent, for example, toluene, xylene, benzene, hexane, heptane, cyclohexane, diethyl ether, diisopropyl ether, dimethoxyethane, anisol, tetrahydrofuran, methylene chloride, chloroform, ethylene dichloride, chlorobenzene, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide,
  • the support having on its surface the compound having the functional group X has a contact angle of water droplet in air of 70° or more on its surface.
  • the measurement of the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support can be carried out according to the following method. Specifically, under atmosphere of 25°C, 1 to 3 ⁇ l of distilled water is dropped on a support to be measured and after a lapse of 60 seconds for stabilization, the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support is measured based on a conventional ⁇ /2 method using a contact angle meter DAC-VZ produced by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.
  • the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support is preferably 75° or more, more preferably 80° or more.
  • the support for use in the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is not particularly restricted as long as it has the characteristic described above and it is a dimensionally stable plate-like support.
  • the support includes, for example, paper, paper laminated with plastic (for example, polyethylene, polypropylene or polystyrene), a metal plate (for example, aluminum, zinc or copper plate), a plastic film (for example, cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose nitrate, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene, polystyrene, polypropylene, polycarbonate or polyvinyl acetal film) and paper or a plastic film laminated or deposited with the metal described above.
  • Preferable examples of the support include a polyester film and an aluminum plate. Among them, the aluminum plate is preferred since it has good dimensional stability and is relatively inexpensive.
  • the aluminum plate includes a pure aluminum plate, an alloy plate comprising aluminum as a main component and containing a trace amount of hetero elements and a thin film of aluminum or aluminum alloy laminated with plastic.
  • the hetero element contained in the aluminum alloy includes, for example, silicon, iron, manganese, copper, magnesium, chromium, zinc, bismuth, nickel and titanium,
  • the content of the hetero element in the aluminum alloy is preferably 10% by weight or less.
  • a pure aluminum plate is preferred in the invention, since completely pure aluminum is difficult to be produced in view of the refining technique, the aluminum plate may slightly contain the hetero element.
  • the composition is not specified for the aluminum plate and those materials conventionally known and used can be appropriately utilized.
  • the thickness of the aluminum support is preferably from 0.1 to 0.6 mm, more preferably from 0.15 to 0.4 mm, still more preferably from 0.2 to 0.3 mm.
  • a surface treatment for example, roughening treatment or anodizing treatment is preferably performed prior to the use of aluminum plate.
  • the surface treatment enlarges the range of change in the contact angle according to the invention, facilitates to ensure adhesion between the photosensitive layer and the support and improve the stain resistance.
  • a degreasing treatment for example, with a surfactant, an organic solvent or an aqueous alkaline solution is conducted for removing rolling oil on the surface thereof, if desired.
  • the roughening treatment of the surface of the aluminum plate is conducted by various methods and includes, for example, mechanical roughening treatment, electrochemical roughening treatment (roughening treatment of electrochemically dissolving the surface) and chemical roughening treatment (roughening treatment of chemically dissolving the surface selectively).
  • a known method for example, a ball grinding method, a brush grinding method, a blast grinding method or a buff grinding method can be used.
  • the electrochemical roughening treatment method includes, for example, a method of conducting it by passing alternating current or direct current in an electrolytic solution containing an acid, for example, hydrochloric acid or nitric acid. Also, a method of using a mixed acid described in JP-A-54-63902 can be used.
  • the aluminum plate after the roughening treatment is subjected, if desired, to an alkali etching treatment using an aqueous solution, for example, of potassium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide and further subjected to a neutralizing treatment, and then subjected to an anodizing treatment in order to enhance the abrasion resistance, if desired.
  • an alkali etching treatment using an aqueous solution, for example, of potassium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide and further subjected to a neutralizing treatment, and then subjected to an anodizing treatment in order to enhance the abrasion resistance, if desired.
  • electrolyte used for the anodizing treatment of the aluminum plate various electrolytes capable of forming porous oxide film can be used. Ordinarily, sulfuric acid, hydrochloric acid, oxalic acid, chromic acid or a mixed acid thereof is used. The concentration of the electrolyte can be appropriately determined depending on the kind of the electrolyte.
  • electrolyte concentration in the solution is from 1 to 80% by weight
  • liquid temperature is from 5 to 70°C
  • current density is from 5 to 60 A/dm 2
  • voltage is from 1 to 100 V
  • electrolysis time is from 10 seconds to 5 minutes.
  • the amount of the anodized film formed is preferably from 1.0 to 5.0 g/m 2 , more preferably from 1.5 to 4.0 g/m 2 . In the range described above, good printing durability and preferable scratch resistance in the non-image area of lithographic printing plate can be achieved.
  • the aluminum plate subjected to the surface treatment and having the anodized film is used as it is as the support in the invention.
  • other treatment for example, a treatment for enlarging micropores or a sealing treatment of micropores of the anodized film described in JP-A-2001-253181 and JP-A-2001-322365 , or a surface hydrophilizing treatment by immersing the support in an aqueous solution containing a hydrophilic compound, may be appropriately conducted.
  • the enlarging treatment and sealing treatment are not limited to those described in the above-described patents and any conventionally known method may be employed.
  • sealing treatment as well as a sealing treatment with steam, a sealing treatment with an aqueous solution containing an inorganic fluorine compound, for example, fluorozirconic acid alone or sodium fluoride, a sealing treatment with steam having added thereto lithium chloride or a sealing treatment with hot water may be employed.
  • an inorganic fluorine compound for example, fluorozirconic acid alone or sodium fluoride
  • a sealing treatment with steam having added thereto lithium chloride or a sealing treatment with hot water
  • the sealing treatment with an aqueous solution containing an inorganic fluorine compound the sealing treatment with water vapor and a sealing treatment with hot water are preferred.
  • the hydrophilizing treatment includes an alkali metal silicate method described in U.S. Patents 2,714,066 , 3,181,461 , 3,280,734 and 3,902,734 .
  • the support is subjected to an immersion treatment or an electrolytic treatment in an aqueous solution, for example, of sodium silicate.
  • the hydrophilizing treatment includes, for example, a method of treating with potassium fluorozirconate described in JP-B-36-22063 and a method of treating with polyvinylphosphonic acid described in U.S. Patents 3,276,868 , 4,153,461 and 4,689,272 .
  • an antistatic layer on one side or both sides thereof.
  • the antistatic layer a polymer layer having fine particles of metal oxide or a matting agent dispersed therein described in JP-A-2002-79772 can be used.
  • the support preferably has a center line average roughness of 0.10 to 1.2 ⁇ m. In the range described above, good adhesion to the photosensitive layer, good printing durability and good stain resistance can be achieved.
  • the color density of the support is preferably from 0.15 to 0.65 in terms of the reflection density value. In the range described above, good image-forming property by preventing halation at the image exposure and good aptitude for plate inspection after development can be achieved.
  • the support according to the invention prepares a lithographic printing plate precursor by forming a photosensitive layer thereon.
  • a lithographic printing plate precursor when it is used as a support for lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type having a photosensitive layer capable of being developed with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, the lithographic printing plate precursor exerting excellent printing durability and stain resistance can be provided.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention comprises a photosensitive layer on the support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more described above.
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors may be classified into (1) a radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor, (2) a heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor and (3) a polarity conversion type lithographic printing plate precursor mainly depending on the characteristics of the photosensitive layer (hereinafter, also referred to as an "image-forming layer”) and the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can be used as any of these types.
  • the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor contains a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, a binder polymer, a sensitizing dye and other components.
  • the components constituting the photosensitive layer are described below, respectively.
  • the polymerizable compound for use in the photosensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is an addition-polymerizable compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and it is selected from compounds having at least one, preferably two or more, terminal ethylenically unsaturated double bonds.
  • Such compounds are widely known in the art and they can be used in the invention without any particular limitation.
  • the compound has a chemical form, for example, a monomer, a prepolymer, specifically, a dimer, a trimer or an oligomer, or a copolymer thereof, or a mixture thereof.
  • the monomer examples include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid or maleic acid) and esters or amides thereof.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid or maleic acid
  • esters of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound and amides of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound are used.
  • An addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a nucleophilic substituent, for example, a hydroxy group, an amino group or a mercapto group, with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy compound, or a dehydration condensation reaction product of the unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent for example, an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol, or a substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a releasable substituent, for example, a halogen atom or a tosyloxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also preferably used.
  • compounds in which the unsaturated carboxylic acid described above is replaced by an unsaturated phosphonic acid, styrene, vinyl ether or the like can also be used.
  • the monomer which is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound with an unsaturated carboxylic acid
  • acrylic acid esters for example, ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, tetramethylene glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(acryloyloxypropyl) ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaned
  • ester which can be preferably used, include aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-51-47334 and JP-A-57-196231 , esters having an aromatic skeleton described in JP-A-59-5240 , JP-A-59-5241 and JP-A-2-226149 , and esters containing an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613 .
  • ester monomers can also be used as a mixture.
  • the monomer which is an amide of an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound with an unsaturated carboxylic acid
  • the monomer which is an amide of an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound with an unsaturated carboxylic acid
  • examples of the monomer include methylene bisacrylamide, methylene bismethacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bisacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bismethacrylamide, diethylenetriamine trisacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide and xylylene bismethacrylamide.
  • Other preferable examples of the amide monomer include amides having a cyclohexylene structure described in JP-B-54-21726 .
  • Urethane type addition-polymerizable compounds produced using an addition reaction between an isocyanate and a hydroxy group are also preferably used, and specific examples thereof include vinylurethane compounds having two or more polymerizable vinyl groups per molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer containing a hydroxy group represented by formula (A) shown below to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups per molecule, described in JP-B-48-41708 .
  • CH 2 C(R 4 )COOCH 2 CH(R 5 )OH (A) wherein R 4 and R 5 each independently represents H or CH 3 .
  • urethane acrylates described in JP-A-51-37193 , JP-B-2-32293 and JP-B-2-16765 and urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860 , JP-B-56-17654 , JP-B-62-39417 and JP-B-62-39418 are preferably used.
  • a photopolymerizable composition having remarkably excellent photo-speed can be obtained by using an addition polymerizable compound having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in its molecule, described in JP-A-63-277653 , JP-A-63-260909 and JP-A-1-105238 .
  • polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates for example, polyester acrylates and epoxy acrylates obtained by reacting an epoxy resin with (meth)acrylic acid, described in JP-A-48-64183 , JP-B-49-43191 and JP-B-52-30490 .
  • Specific unsaturated compounds described in JP-B-46-43946 , JP-B-1-40337 and JP-B-1-40336 , and vinylphosphonic acid type compounds described in JP-A-2-25493 can also be exemplified.
  • structure containing a perfluoroalkyl group described in JP-A-61-22048 can be preferably used.
  • photocurable monomers or oligomers described in Nippon Secchaku Kyokaishi Journal of Japan Adhesion Society
  • Vol. 20, No. 7, pages 300 to 308 (1984 ) can also be used.
  • the method of using the polymerizable compound for example, selection of the structure, individual or combination use or an amount added, can be appropriately determined in accordance with the characteristic design of the final lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • the polymerizable compound is selected from the following standpoints.
  • a structure having a large content of unsaturated group per molecule is preferred and in many cases, a difunctional or more functional compound is preferred.
  • a trifunctional or more functional compound is preferred.
  • a combination use of compounds different in the functional number or in the kind of polymerizable group is an effective method for controlling both the sensitivity and the strength.
  • the selection and use method of the polymerizable compound are also important factors for the compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, a binder polymer, a polymerization initiator or a coloring agent) in the photosensitive layer.
  • the compatibility may be improved in some cases by using the compound of low purity or using two or more kinds of the compounds in combination.
  • a specific structure may be selected for the purpose of improving an adhesion property to a support, a protective layer or the like described hereinafter.
  • the polymerizable compound is used preferably in a range from 5 to 80% by weight, more preferably in a range from 25 to 75% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • the polymerizable compounds may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the structure, blend and amount added can be appropriately selected by taking account of the degree of polymerization inhibition due to oxygen, resolution, fogging property, change in refractive index, surface tackiness and the like. Further, depending on the case, a layer construction, for example, an undercoat layer or an overcoat layer, and a coating method, may also be considered.
  • the polymerization initiator for use in the photosensitive layer according to the invention is a compound which generates a radical with light energy or heat energy to initiate or accelerate polymerization of a compound having a polymerizable unsaturated group.
  • the polymerization initiator is appropriately selected to use, for example, from known polymerization initiators and compounds containing a bond having small bond dissociation energy.
  • the polymerization initiators include, for example, organic halogen compounds, carbonyl compounds, organic peroxides, azo compounds, azido compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, organic boron compounds, disulfone compounds, oxime ester compounds and onium salt compounds.
  • the organic halogen compounds described above specifically include, for example, compounds described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969 ), U.S. Patent 3,905,815 , JP-B-46-4605 , JP-A-48-36281 , JP-A-53-133428 , JP-A-55-32070 , JP-A-60-239736 , JP-A-61-169835 , JP-A-61-169837 , JP-A-62-58241 , JP-A-62-212401 , JP-A-63-70243 , JP-A-63-298339 and M. P. Hutt, Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry. 1, No. 3 (1970 ). Among them, oxazole compounds and s-triazine compounds each substituted with a trihalomethyl group are preferable.
  • s-triazine derivatives in which at least one of mono-, di- or tri-halogen substituted methyl group is connected to the s-triazine ring and oxadiazole derivatives in which at least one of mono-, di- or tri-halogen substituted methyl group is connected to the oxadiazole ring are exemplified.
  • the carbonyl compounds described above include, for example, benzophenone derivatives, e.g., benzophenone, Michler's ketone, 2-methylbenzophenone, 3-methylbenzophenone, 4-methylbenzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4-bromobenzophenone or 2-carboxybenzophenone, acetophenone derivatives, e.g., 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenylketone, ⁇ -hydroxy-2-methylphenylpropane, 1-hydroxy-1-methylethyl-(p-isopropylphenyl)kelone, 1-hydroxy-1-(p-dodecylphenyl)ketone, 2-methyl-(4'-(methylthio)phenyl)-2-morpholino-1-propane or 1,1,1,-trichloromethyl-(p-butylphenyl)ketone, thioxantone
  • the azo compounds described above include, for example, azo compounds described in JP-A-8-108621 .
  • organic peroxides described above include, for example, trimethylcyclohexanone peroxide, acetylacetone peroxide, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, 2,2-bis(tert-butylperoxy)butane, tert-butylhydroperoxide, cumene hydroperoxide, diisopropylbenzene hydroperoxide, 2,5-dimethylhexane-2,5-dihydroperoxide, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide, tert-butylcumyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, 2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane, 2,5-oxanoyl peroxide, peroxy succinic acid, benzoyl peroxide, 2,4-
  • the metallocene compounds described above include, for example, various titanocene compounds described in JP-A-59-152396 , TP- A-61-151197 , JP-A-63-41484 , JP-A-2-249 , JP-A-2-4705 and JP-A-5-83588 , for example, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bisphenyl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,6-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,4-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,4,6-triafluoropben-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1
  • hexaarylbiimidazole compounds described above include, for example, various compounds described in JP-B-6-29285 and U.S. Patents 3,479,185 , 4,311,783 and 4,622,286 , specifically, for example, 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-bromophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,p-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetra(m-methoxyphenyl)biimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,o'-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphen
  • organic boron compounds described above include, for example, organic boric acid salts described in JP-A-62-143044 , JP-A-62-150242 , JP-A-9-188685 , JP-A-9-188686 , JP-A-9-188710 , JP-A-2000-131837 , JP-A-2002-107916 , Japanese Patent 2764769 , JP-A-2002-116539 and Martin Kunz, Rad Tech '98, Proceeding, April 19-22 (1998), Chicago , organic boron sulfonium complexes or organic boron oxosulfonium complexes described in JP-A-6-157623 , JP-A-6-175564 and JP-A-6-175561 , organic boron iodonium complexes described in JP-A-6-175554 and JP-A-6-175553 , organic boron phosphonium complexes described in JP-A-9-188710 , and organic boro
  • the disulfone compounds described above include, for example, compounds described in JP-A-61-166544 and JP-A-2002-328465 .
  • the oxime ester compounds described above include, for example, compounds described in J. C. S. Perkin II, 1653-1660 (1979 ), J. C. S. Perkin II, 156-162 (1979 ), Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology, 202-232 (1995 ) and JP-A-2000-66385 , and compounds described in JP-A-2000-80068 . Specific examples thereof include compounds represented by the following structural formulae:
  • the onium salt compounds described above include onium salts, for example, diazonium salts described in S. I. Schlesinger, Photogr. Sci, Eng., 18, 387 (1974 ) and T. S. Bal et al., Polymer, 21, 423 (1980 ), ammonium salts described in U.S. Patent 4,069,055 and JP-A-4-365049 , phosphonium salts described in U.S. Patents 4,069,055 and 4,069,056 , iodonium salts described in European Patent 104,143 , U.S.
  • onium salts for example, diazonium salts described in S. I. Schlesinger, Photogr. Sci, Eng., 18, 387 (1974 ) and T. S. Bal et al., Polymer, 21, 423 (1980 ), ammonium salts described in U.S. Patent 4,069,055 and JP-A-4-365049 , phosphonium salts described in U.S. Patent
  • the onium salt functions not as an acid generator, but as an ionic radical polymerization initiator.
  • the onium salts preferably used in the invention include onium salts represented by the following formulae (RI-I) to (RI-III):
  • Ar 11 represents an aryl group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have 1 to 6 substituents.
  • substituents include an alkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an alkylamino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a dialkylimino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkylamido group or arylamido having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a sulfonyl group, an thioalkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms and an thioaryl group having 12 or less carbon
  • Z 11 - represents a monovalent anion.
  • the monovalent anion include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion, a thosulfonate ion and a sulfate ion.
  • a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion and a sulfinate ion are preferred in view of stability.
  • Ar 21 and Ar 22 each independently represents an aryl group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have 1 to 6 substituents.
  • substituents include an alkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an alkylamino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a dialkylimino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkylamido group or arylamido group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a sulfonyl group, an thioalkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms and an thio
  • Z 21 - represents a monovalent anion.
  • the monovalent anion include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion, a thosulfonate ion, a sulfate ion and a carboxylate ion.
  • a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion and a carboxylate ion are preferred in view of stability and reactivity.
  • R 31 , R 32 and R 33 each independently represents an aryl group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have 1 to 6 substituents, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an alkynyl group. Among them, the aryl group is preferred in view of reactivity and stability.
  • substituents include an alkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an alkylamino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a dialkylimino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkylamido group or arylamido group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a sulfonyl group, an thioalkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms and an thioaryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms.
  • Z 31 - represents a monovalent anion.
  • the monovalent anion include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion, a thosulfonate ion, a sulfate ion and a carboxylate ion.
  • a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion and a carboxylate ion are preferred in view of stability and reactivity.
  • Carboxylate ions described in JP-A-2001-343742 are more preferable, and carboxylate ions described in JP-A-2002-148790 are particularly preferable.
  • the polymerization initiator is not limited to those described above.
  • the triazine type initiators organic halogen compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime ester compounds, diazonium salts, iodonium salts and sulfonium salts are more preferable.
  • the polymerization initiators may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof. Also, the polymerization initiator may be added together with other components in one layer or may be added to a different layer separately provided.
  • the polymerization initiator can be added preferably in an amount from 0.1 to 50% by weight, more preferably from 0.5 to 30% by weight, particularly preferably from 0.8 to 20% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • the binder polymer which can be used in the photosensitive layer according to the invention is preferably a water-insoluble polymer. Further, the binder polymer which can be used in the invention preferably does not substantially contain an acid group, for example, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group or a phosphoric acid group.
  • An acid value (acid content per g of polymer, indicated by the chemical equivalent number) of the binder polymer is preferably 0.3 meq/g or less, more preferably 0.1 meq/g or less.
  • the binder polymer which can be used in the invention is preferably insoluble in water and an aqueous solution having a pH of 10 or more.
  • the solubility of the hydrophobic binder polymer in water or an aqueous solution having a pH of 10 or more is preferably 0.5% by weight or less, more preferably 0.1% by weight or less.
  • binder polymer conventionally known binder polymers preferably having the characteristics in the above-described range can be used without limitation as long as the performances of the lithographic printing plate of the invention are not impaired, and a linear organic polymer having film-forming property is preferred.
  • binder polymer examples include a polymer selected from an acrylic resin, a polyvinyl acetal resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, an epoxy resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin and a polyester resin.
  • an acrylic resin is preferred, and a (meth)acrylic acid ester copolymer is more preferred.
  • a copolymer of a (meth)acrylic acid alkyl or aralkyl ester with a (meth)acrylic acid ester containing a -CH 2 CH 2 O- or -CH 2 CH 2 NH- unit in R of the ester residue (-COOR) of the (meth)acrylic acid ester is particularly preferred.
  • the alkyl group in the (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferably an alkyl group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the (meth)acrylic acid aralkyl ester include benzyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the binder polymer can be imparted with a crosslinking property in order to increase the film strength of the image area.
  • a crosslinkable functional group is introduced into a main chain or side chain of the polymer.
  • the crosslinkable functional group may be introduced by copolymerization or a polymer reaction.
  • crosslinkable group means a group capable of crosslinking the polymer binder in the process of a radical polymerization reaction which is caused in the photosensitive layer, when the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed to light.
  • the crosslinkable group is not particularly restricted as long as it has such a function and includes, for example, an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, an amino group or an epoxy group as a functional group capable of conducting an addition polymerization reaction.
  • a functional group capable of forming a radical upon irradiation with light may be used and such a crosslinkable group includes, for example, a thiol group, a halogen atom and an onium salt structure.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferable, and functional groups represented by formulae (1) to (3) shown below are particularly preferable.
  • R 1 to R 3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 1 preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. Among them, a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable because of high radical reactivity.
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent.
  • a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent is preferable because of high radical reactivity.
  • X represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or -N(R 12 )-
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group represented by R 12 includes, for example, an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or an isopropyl group is preferable for R 12 because of high radical reactivity.
  • Examples of the substituent introduced include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an amido group, an alkylsulfonyl group and an arylsulfonyl group.
  • R 4 to R 8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 4 to R 8 each independently preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amino group, a dialkylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent.
  • Y represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or -N(R 12 )-, and R 12 has the same meaning as R 12 defined in Formula (1).
  • Preferable examples for R 12 are also same as those described in Formula (1).
  • R 9 to R 11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group includes, for example, an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable for R 9 because of high radical reactivity.
  • R 10 and R 11 each independently preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amino group, a dialkylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent.
  • a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent is preferable because
  • Z represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, -N(R 13 )- or a phenylene group which may have a substituent.
  • R 13 includes an alkyl group which may have a substituent or the like. Among them, a methyl group, an ethyl group or an isopropyl group is preferable for R 13 because of high radical reactivity.
  • a (meth)acrylic acid copolymer and a polyurethane each having a crosslinkable functional group in the side chain thereof are more preferable.
  • a free radical a polymerization initiating radical or a propagating radical in the process of polymerization of the polymerizable compound
  • a free radical is added to the crosslinkable functional group to cause addition-polymerization between polymers directly or through a polymerization chain of the polymerizable compound, as a result, crosslinking is formed between polymer molecules to effect curing.
  • an atom for example, a hydrogen atom on the carbon atom adjacent to the functional crosslinkable group
  • the polymer radicals are combined with each other to form crosslinking between polymer molecules to effect curing.
  • the content of the crosslinkable functional group (content of radical-polymerizable unsaturated double bond determined by iodine titration) in the binder polymer is preferably from 0.1 to 10.0 mmol, more preferably from 1.0 to 7.0 mmol, most preferably from 2.0 to 5.5 mmol, per g of the binder polymer.
  • the binder polymer is preferably hydrophilic.
  • the binder polymer in view of increasing the printing durability, it is important that the binder polymer has good compatibility with the polymerizable compound contained in the photosensitive layer, that is, the binder polymer is preferably oleophilic. From these standpoints, it is also effective in the invention to copolymerize a hydrophilic group-containing component and an oleophilic group-containing component in the binder polymer in order to improve the developing property and printing durability.
  • hydrophilic group in the hydrophilic group-containing component include a hydroxy group, a carboxylate group, a hydroxyethyl group, an ethyleneoxy group, a hydroxypropyl group, a polyoxyethyl group, a polyoxypropyl group, an amino group, an aminoethyl group, an aminopropyl group, an ammonium group, an amido group, a carboxymethyl group, a sulfonate group and a phosphonate group.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 5,000 or more, more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000, and a number average molecular weight of 1,000 or more, more preferably from 2,000 to 250,000.
  • the polydispersity is preferably from 1.1 to 10.
  • the binder polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer and the like, and it is preferably a random polymer.
  • the binder polymers may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the content of the binder polymer is ordinarily from 5 to 90% by weight, preferably from 10 to 70% by weight, more preferably from 10 to 60% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer. In the range described above, preferable strength of the image area and good image-forming property are obtained.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a sensitizing dye corresponding to a wavelength of an exposure light source.
  • the sensitizing dye is appropriately selected depending on the use or the like and is not particularly restricted. For instance, a sensitizing dye absorbing light of 350 to 450 nm and an infrared absorbing agent are exemplified.
  • the sensitizing dye absorbing light of 350 to 450 nm for use in the invention preferably has an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 350 to 450 nm.
  • Such sensitizing dyes include, for example, merocyanine dyes represented by formula (I) shown below, benzopyranes or coumarins represented by formula (II) shown below, aromatic ketones represented by formula (III) shown below and anthracenes represented by formula (IV) shown below.
  • A represents a sulfur atom or NR 6
  • R 6 represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group
  • Y represents a non-metallic atomic group necessary for forming a basic nucleus of the dye together with adjacent A and the adjacent carbon atom
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group or X 1 and X 2 may be combined with each other to form an acidic nucleus of the dye.
  • formula (II) Z represents an oxo group, a thioxo group, an imino group or an alkylydene group represented by the partial structural formula (I') described above, X 1 and X 2 have the same meanings as defined in formula (I) respectively, and R 7 to R 12 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group.
  • Ar 3 represents an aromatic group which may have a substituent or a heteroaromatic group which may have a substituent
  • R 13 represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group.
  • R 13 preferably represents an aromatic group or a heteroaromatic group.
  • Ar 3 and R 13 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • X 3 , X 4 and R 14 to R 21 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group.
  • X 3 and X 4 each independently represents an electron-donating group having a negative Hammett substituent constant.
  • preferable examples of the monovalent non-metallic atomic group represented by any one of X 1 to X 4 and R 6 to R 21 include a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, an undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an eucosyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl goup, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group (for example, a
  • the basic nucleus of the dye formed by Y together with the adjacent A and the adjacent carbon atom in formula (I) includes, for example, a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered, nitrogen-containing or sulfur-containing heterocyclic ring, and is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered heterocyclic ring.
  • nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring those which are known to constitute basic nuclei in merocyanine dyes described in L.G. Brooker et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 73, pp. 5326 to 5358 (1951 ) and references cited therein can be preferably used.
  • thiazoles for example, thiazole, 4-methylthiazole, 4-phenylthiazole, 5-methylthiazole, 5-phenylthiazole, 4,5-dimethylthiazole, 4,5-diphenylthiazole, 4,5-di(p-methoxyphenyl)thiazole or 4-(2-thienyl)thiazole); benxothiazoles (for example, benzothiazole, 4-chlorobenzothiazole, 5-chlorobenzothiazole, 6-chlorobenzothiazole, 7-chlorobenzothiazole, 4-methylbenzothiazole, 5-methylbenzothiazole, 6-methylbenzothiazole, 5-bromobenzothiazole, 4-phenylbenzothiazole, 5-phenylbenzothiazole, 4-methoxybenzothiazole, 5-methoxybenzothiazole, 6-methoxybenzothiazole, 5-iodobenzothiazole, 6-iodo
  • sulfur-containing heterocyclic ring examples include dithiol partial structures in dyes described in JP-A-3-296759 .
  • benzodithiols for example, benzodithiol, 5-tert-butylbenzodithiol or 5-methylbenzodithiol
  • naphthodithiols for example, naphtho[1,2]dithiol or naphtho[2,1]dithiol
  • dithiols for example, 4,5-dimethyldithiol, 4-phenyldithiol, 4-methoxycarbonyldithiol, 4,5-dimethoxycarbonyldithiol, 4,5-ditrifluoromethyldithiol, 4,5-dicyanodithiol, 4-methoxycarbonylmethyldithiol or 4-carboxymethyldithiol).
  • heterocyclic mother skeletons are used.
  • the heterocyclic ring is introduced in the form of a substituent of alkylydene type where a degree of unsaturation is decreased one step.
  • a benzothiazole skeleton is introduced as a 3-substituted-2(3H)-benzothiazolylidene group.
  • dyes represented by formula (V) shown below are more preferable in view of high sensitivity.
  • A represents an aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group, or A and R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be combined with each other to form an aliphatic or aromatic ring.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group, preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group, a hydroxy group or a halogen atom.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 will be specifically described below.
  • the alkyl group include a straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Specific examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, an undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an eucosyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a 1-methyl
  • a straight chain alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms a branched alkyl group having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms and a cyclic alkyl group having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms are more preferable.
  • a monovalent non-metallic atomic group exclusive of a hydrogen atom is used.
  • a halogen atom for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • a hydroxy group for example, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkyldithio group, an aryldithio group, an amino group, an N-alkylamino group, an N,N-dialkylamino group, an N-arylamino group, an N,N-diarylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyloxy group, an N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, an N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, an N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl
  • alkyl group examples include those described for the alkyl group above.
  • aryl group examples include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, an ethoxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, an acetoxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a phenylthiophenyl group, a methylaminophenyl group, a dimethylaminophenyl group, an acetylaminophenyl group, a carboxyphenyl group, a meth
  • heteroaryl group examples include a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic cyclic group containing at least one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • heteroaryl group examples include a group derived from a heteroaryl ring, for example, thiophene, thiathrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxazine, pyrrole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindolizine, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, phthalazine, naphthylidine, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthrene, acridine, perimidine, phenanthroline,
  • Examples of the alkenyl group include a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 1-butenyl group, a cinnamyl group and a 2-chloro-1-ethenyl group.
  • Examples of the alkynyl group include an ethynyl group, a 1-propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group and a trimethylsilylethynyl group.
  • Examples of G 1 in the acyl group (G 1 CO-) include a hydrogen atom, the above-described alkyl group and aryl group.
  • a halogen atom for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I
  • an alkoxy group for example,
  • alkylene group in the substituted alkyl group a divalent organic residue resulting from elimination of any one of hydrogen atoms on the above-described alkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms can be enumerated.
  • preferable alkylene group include a straight chain alkylene group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkylene group having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms and a cyclic alkylene group having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the preferable substituted alkyl group represented by any one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 which is obtained by combining the above-described substituent with the alkylene group, include a chloromethyl group, a bromomethyl group, a 2-chloroethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a methoxymethyl group, a methoxyethoxyethyl group, an allyloxymethyl group, a phenoxymethyl group, a methylthiomethyl group, a tolylthiomethyl group, an ethylaminoethyl group, a diethylaminopropyl group, a morpholinopropyl group, an acetyloxymethyl group, a benzoyloxymethyl group, an N-cyclohexylcarbamoyloxyethyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoyloxyethyl group, an acetylaminoethyl group,
  • aryl group represented by any one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 include a fused ring formed from one to three benzene rings and a fused ring formed from a benzene ring and a 5-membered unsaturated ring.
  • Specific examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, a phenanthryl group, an indenyl group, an acenaphthenyl group and a fluorenyl group.
  • a phenyl group and a naphthyl group are more preferable.
  • the preferable substituted aryl group represented by any one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 include aryl groups having a monovalent non-metallic atomic group exclusive of a hydrogen atom as a substituent on the ring-forming carbon atom of the above-described aryl group.
  • the substituent include the above-described alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups, and the substituents described for the above-described substituted alkyl group.
  • the preferable substituted aryl group include a biphenyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a fluorophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a trifluoromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, a methoxyethoxyphenyl group, an allyloxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a tolylthiophenyl group, an ethylaminophenyl group, a diethylaminophenyl group, a morpholinophenyl group, an acetyloxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, an N-cyclohexylcarbamoyl group,
  • Examples of the preferable substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group and the preferable substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group represented by any one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 include those described with respect to the alkenyl group and heteroaryl group above, respectively.
  • A represents an aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent or heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
  • aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent or heterocyclic group which may have a substituent include those described for the aryl group and heteroaryl group for any one of R 1 , R 2 and R 3 in formula (V).
  • the sensitizing dye represented by formula (V) is obtained by a condensation reaction of the above-described acidic nucleus or an active methyl group-containing acidic nucleus with a substituted or unsubstituted, aromatic ring or hetero ring and can be synthesized with reference to the description of JP-B-59-28329 .
  • the sensitizing dye absorbing having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 350 to 450 nm is used preferably in a range of 1.0 to 10.0% by weight, more preferably in a range of 1.5 to 8.0% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • the infrared absorbing agent is a component used for increasing sensitivity to an infrared laser.
  • the infrared absorbing agent has a function of converting the infrared ray absorbed to heat.
  • the infrared absorbing agent for use in the invention is preferably a dye or pigment having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 760 to 1,200 nm.
  • the dye includes azo dyes, metal complex azo dyes, pyrazolone azo dyes, naphthoquinone dyes, anthraquinone dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, carbonium dyes, quinoneimine dyes, methine dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium salts and metal thiolate complexes.
  • preferable dye examples include cyanine dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-125246 , JP-A-59-84356 and JP-A-60-78787 , methine dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-173696 , JP-A-58-181690 and JP-A-58-194595 , naphthoquinone dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-112793 , JP-A-58-224793 , JP-A-59-48197 , JP-A-59-73996 , JP-A-60-52940 and JP-A-60-63744 , squarylium dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-112792 , and cyanine dyes described, for example, in British Patent 434,875 .
  • near infrared absorbing sensitizers described in U.S. Patent 5,156,938 are preferably used.
  • substituted arylbenzo(thio)pyrylium salts described in U.S. Patent 3,881,924 are substituted arylbenzo(thio)pyrylium salts described in U.S. Patent 3,881,924 , trimethinethiapyrylium salts described in JP-A-57-142645 (corresponding to U.S.
  • Patent 4,327,169 pyrylium compounds described in JP-A-58-181051 , JP-A-58-220143 , JP-A-59-41363 , JP-A-59-84248 , JP-A-59-84249 , JP-A-59-146063 and JP-A-59-146061 , cyanine dyes described in JP-A-59-216146 , pentamethinethiopyrylium salts described in U.S. Patent 4,283,475 , and pyrylium compounds described in JP-B-5-13514 and JP-B-5-19702 are also preferably used.
  • Other preferred examples of the dye include near infrared absorbing dyes represented by formulae (I) and (II) in U.S. Patent 4,756,993 .
  • infrared absorbing dye examples include specific indolenine cyanine dyes described in JP-A-2002-278057 as illustrated below.
  • cyanine dyes cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium dyes, nickel thiolate complexes and indolenine cyanine dyes are particularly preferred. Further, cyanine dyes and indolenine cyanine dyes are more preferred. As a particularly preferable example of the dye, a cyanine dye represented by the following formula (I) is exemplified.
  • X 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, -NPh 2 , X 2 -L 1 or a group shown below.
  • X 2 represents an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom
  • L 1 represents a hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an aromatic ring containing a hetero atom or a hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and containing a hetero atom.
  • the hetero atom indicates here a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, an oxygen atom, a halogen atom or a selenium atom.
  • Xa - has the same meaning as Za' defined hereinafter.
  • R a represents a substituent selected from a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted amino group and a halogen atom.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 and R 2 each represents a hydrocarbon group having two or more carbon atoms, and it is particularly preferred that R 1 and R 2 are combined with each other to form a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 which may be the same or different, each represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring.
  • substituent include a hydrocarbon group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom and an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 which may be the same or different, each represents a sulfur atom or a dialkylmethylene group having 12 or less carbon atoms.
  • R 3 and R 4 which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carboxyl group and a sulfo group.
  • R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 12 or less carbon atoms. In view of the availability of raw materials, a hydrogen atom is preferred.
  • Za - represents a counter anion. However, Za - is not necessary when the cyanine dye represented by formula (I) has an anionic substituent in the structure thereof and neutralization of charge is not needed.
  • Preferable examples of the counter ion for Za - include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion and a sulfonate ion, and particularly preferable examples thereof include a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion and an arylsulfonate ion in view of the preservation stability of a coating solution for photosensitive layer.
  • cyanine dye represented by formula (I) which can be preferably used in the invention, include those described in Paragraph Nos. [0017] to [0019] of JP-A-2001-133969 ,
  • Examples of the pigment for use in the invention include commercially available pigments and pigments described in Colour Index (C.I.) , Saishin Ganryo Binran (Handbook of the Newest Pigments) compiled by Pigment Technology Society of Japan (1977 ), Saishin Ganryo Oyou Gijutsu (Newest Applicarion on Technologies for Pigments), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986 ) and Insatsu Ink Gijutsu (Printing Ink Technology), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1984 ).
  • Colour Index C.I.
  • Saishin Ganryo Binran Haandbook of the Newest Pigments
  • Saishin Ganryo Oyou Gijutsu Newest Applicarion on Technologies for Pigments
  • CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986 ) and Insatsu Ink Gijutsu (Printing Ink Technology), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1984 ).
  • the pigment examples include black pigments, yellow pigments, orange pigments, brown pigments, red pigments, purple pigments, blue pigments, green pigments, fluorescent pigments, metal powder pigments and polymer-bonded dyes.
  • Specific examples of usable pigment include insoluble azo pigments, azo lake pigments, condensed azo pigments, chelated azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, perylene and perynone pigments, thioindigo pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, dying lake pigments, azine pigments, nitroso pigments, nitro pigments, natural pigments, fluorescent pigments, inorganic pigments and carbon black.
  • carbon black is preferred.
  • the pigment may be used without undergoing surface treatment or may be used after the surface treatment.
  • a method of coating a resin or wax on the surface a method of attaching a surfactant and a method of bonding a reactive substance (for example, a silane coupling agent, an epoxy compound or polyisocyanate) to the pigment surface.
  • a reactive substance for example, a silane coupling agent, an epoxy compound or polyisocyanate
  • the surface treatment methods are described in Kinzoku Sekken no Seishitsu to Oyo (properties and Applications of Metal Soap). Saiwai Shobo, Insatsu Ink Gijutsu (printing Ink Technology) CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1984 ), and Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu (Newest Application on Technologies for Pigments), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986 ).
  • the pigment has a particle size of preferably from 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.05 to 1 ⁇ m, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m. In the above-described range, good stability and good uniformity of the pigment dispersion in the photosensitive layer can be obtained.
  • dispersing the pigment For dispersing the pigment, a known dispersion technique for use in the production of ink or toner may be used.
  • the dispersing machine include an ultrasonic dispersing machine, a sand mill, an attritor, a pearl mill, a super-mill, a ball mill, an impeller, a disperser, a KD mill, a colloid mill, a dynatron, a three roll mill and a pressure kneader.
  • the dispersing machines are described in detail in Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu (Newest Application on Technologies for Pigments), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986 ).
  • the infrared absorbing agent may be added by being incorporated into a microcapsule.
  • the amount of the infrared absorbing agent added is so controlled that absorbance of the photosensitive layer at the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 760 to 1,200 nm measured by reflection measurement is in a range of 0.3 to 1.3, preferably in a range of 0.4 to 1.2. In the above-described range, the polymerization reaction proceeds uniformly in the thickness direction of the photosensitive layer and good film strength of the image area and good adhesion property of the image area to a support are achieved.
  • the absorbance of the photosensitive layer can be controlled depending on the amount of the infrared absorbing agent added to the photosensitive layer and the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
  • the measurement of the absorbance can be carried out in a conventional manner.
  • the method for measurement includes, for example, a method of forming a photosensitive layer having a thickness determined appropriately in the range necessary for the lithographic printing plate precursor on a reflective support, for example, an aluminum plate, and measuring reflection density of the photosensitive layer by an optical densitometer or a spectrophotometer according to a reflection method using an integrating sphere.
  • the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer can be further increased by using a certain additive.
  • a certain additive is referred to as a co-sensitizer in the invention.
  • the operation mechanism of the co-sensitizer is not quite clear but may be considered to be mostly based on the following chemical process. Specifically, the co-sensitizer reacts with various intermediate active species (for example, a radical, a peroxide, an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent) generated during the process of photo-reaction initiated by light absorption of the photopolymerization initiation system and subsequent addition-polymerization reaction to produce new active radicals.
  • various intermediate active species for example, a radical, a peroxide, an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent
  • the co-sensitizers are roughly classified into (a) a compound which is reduced to produce an active radical, (b) a compound which is oxidized to produce an active radical and (c) a compound which reacts with a radical having low activity to convert it into a more highly active radical or acts as a chain transfer agent.
  • a compound which is reduced to produce an active radical (b) a compound which is oxidized to produce an active radical and (c) a compound which reacts with a radical having low activity to convert it into a more highly active radical or acts as a chain transfer agent.
  • a common view about that an individual compound belongs to which type is not present.
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of the carbon-halogen bond.
  • Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a trihalomethyl-s-triazine and a trihalomethyloxadiazole.
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of the nitrogen-nitrogen bond.
  • Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a hexaarylbiimidazole.
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of the oxygen-oxygen bond.
  • Specific examples of the compound preferably used include an organic peroxide.
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of a carbon-hetero bond or oxygen-nitrogen bond.
  • Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a diaryliodonium salt, a triarylsulfonium salt and an N-alkoxypyridinium (azinium) salt.
  • An active radical can be reductively generated.
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the oxidative cleavage of a carbon-hetero bond.
  • Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a triaryl alkyl borate.
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the oxidative cleavage of a C-X bond on the carbon adjacent to nitrogen, wherein X is preferably a hydrogen atom, a carboxy group, a trimethylsilyl group or a benzyl group.
  • X is preferably a hydrogen atom, a carboxy group, a trimethylsilyl group or a benzyl group.
  • Specific examples of the compound include an ethanolamine, an N-phenylglycine and an N-trimethylsilylmethylaniline.
  • a compound in which the nitrogen atom of the above-described amine is replaced by a sulfur atom or a tin atom is considered to generate an active radical in the same manner. Also, a compound having an S-S bond is known to effect sensitization by the cleavage of the S-S bond.
  • An active radical can be generated by the oxidative cleavage of carbonyl- ⁇ -carbon bond.
  • the compound in which the carbonyl is converted into an oxime ether also shows the similar function.
  • Specific examples of the compound include an 2-alkyl-1-[4-(alkylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinopronone-1 and an oxime ether obtained by a reaction of the 2-alkyl-1-[4-(alkylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinopronone-1 with a hydroxyamine and subsequent etherification of the N-OH.
  • An active radical can be reductively generated.
  • Specific examples of the compound include sodium arylsulfinate.
  • a compound having SH, PH, SiH or GeH in its molecule is used as the compound which reacts with a radical to convert it into a more highly active radical or acts as a chain transfer agent.
  • the compound donates hydrogen to a low active radical species to generate a radical or is oxidized and deprotonized to generate a radical.
  • Specific examples of the compound include a 2-mercaptobenzimidazole.
  • the co-sensitizer can be subjected to various chemical modifications so as to improve the characteristics of the photosensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • methods for example, binding to the sensitizing dye, polymerization initiator, polymerizable compound or other radical-generating part, introduction of a hydrophilic site, introduction of a substituent for improving compatibility or inhibiting deposition of crystal, introduction of a substituent for improving adhesion property, and formation of a polymer, may be used.
  • the co-sensitizers may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the amount of the co-sensitizer used is ordinarily from 0.05 to 100 parts by weight, preferably from 1 to 80 parts by weight, more preferably from 3 to 50 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the polymerizable compound.
  • each constituting component in order to incorporate the above-described constituting components of the photosensitive layer and other constituting components described hereinafter into the photosensitive layer, a part of the constituting components is encapsulated into microcapsules and added to the photosensitive layer as described, for example, in JP-A-2001-277740 and JP-A-2001-277742 .
  • each constituting component may be present inside or outside the microcapsule in an appropriate ratio.
  • Methods for the production of microcapsules include, for example, a method of utilizing coacervation described in U.S. Patents 2,800,457 and 2,800,458 , a method of using interfacial polymerization described in U.S. Patent 3,287,154 , JP-B-38-19574 and JP-B-42-446 , a method of using deposition of polymer described in U.S. Patents 3,418,250 and 3,660,304 , a method of using an isocyanate polyol wall material described in U.S.
  • Patent 3,796,669 a method of using an isocyanate wall material described in U.S. Patent 3,914,511 , a method of using a urea-formaldehyde-type or urea-formaldehyde-resorcinol-type wall-forming material described in U.S. Patens 4,001,140, 4,087,376 and 4,089,802, a method of using a wall material, for example, a melamine-formaldehyde resin or hydroxycellulose described in U.S.
  • Patent 4,025,445 an in-situ method by polymerization of monomer described in JP-B-36-9163 and JP-B-51-9079 , a spray drying method described in British Patent 930,422 and U.S. Patent 3,111,407 , and an electrolytic dispersion cooling method described in British Patents 952,807 and 967,074 , but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • a preferable microcapsule wall used in the invention has three-dimensional crosslinking and has a solvent-swellable property.
  • a preferable wall material of the microcapsule includes polyurea, polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyamide and a mixture thereof, and particularly polyurea and polyurethane are preferred.
  • a compound having a crosslinkable functional group, for example, an ethylenically unsaturated bond, capable of being introduced into the binder polymer described above may be introduced into the microcapsule wall.
  • the average particle size of the microcapsule is preferably from 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.05 to 2.0 ⁇ m, particularly preferably from 0.10 to 1.0 ⁇ m. In the range described above, preferable resolution and good preservation stability can be achieved.
  • the surfactant includes, for example, a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an amphoteric surfactant and a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • the nonionic surfactant used in the invention is not particular restricted, and nonionic surfactants hitherto known can be used.
  • the nonionic surfactant include polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polystyryl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene alkyl ethers, glycerin fatty acid partial esters, sorbitan fatty acid partial esters, pentaerythritol fatty acid partial esters, propylene glycol monofatty acid esters, sucrose fatty acid partial esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid partial esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitol fatty acid partial esters, polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters, polyglycerol fatty acid partial esters, polyoxyethylenated castor oils, polyoxyethylene glycerol fatty acid partial esters, fatty acid diethanolamides, N,N-bis-2-hydroxyalkylamines
  • anionic surfactant used in the invention is not particularly restricted and anionic surfactants hitherto known can be used.
  • anionic surfactant include fatty acid salts, abietic acid salts, hydroxyalkanesulfonic acid salts, alkanesulfonic acid salts, dialkylsulfosuccinic ester salts, straight-chain akylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, branched alkylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts, alkylphenoxypolyoxy ethylene propylsulfonic acid salts, polyoxyethylene alkylsulfophenyl ether salts, N-methyl-N-oleyltaurine sodium salt, N-alkylsulfosuccinic monoamide disodium salts, petroleum sulfonic acid salts, sulfated beef tallow oil, sulfate ester slats of fatty acid alky
  • the cationic surfactant used in the invention is not particularly restricted and cationic surfactants hitherto known can be used.
  • Examples of the cationic surfactant include alkylamine salts, quaternary ammonium salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine salts and polyethylene polyamine derivatives.
  • amphoteric surfactant used in the invention is not particularly restricted and amphoteric surfactants hitherto known can be used.
  • amphoteric surfactant include carboxybetaines, aminocarboxylic acids, sulfobetaines, aminosulfuric esters and imidazolines.
  • polyoxyethylene can be replaced with “polyoxyalkylene", for example, polyoxymethylene, polyoxypropylene or polyoxybutylene, and such surfactants can also be used in the invention.
  • a preferred surfactant includes a fluorine-based surfactant containing a perfluoroalkyl group in its molecule.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant include an anionic type, for example, perfluoroalkyl carboxylates, perfluoroalkyl sulfonates or perfluoroalkylphosphates; an amphoteric type, for example, perfluoroalkyl betaines; a cationic type, for example, perfluoroalkyl trimethyl ammonium salts; and a nonionic type, for example, perfluoroalkyl amine oxides, perfluoroalkyl ethylene oxide adducts, oligomers having a perfluoroalkyl group and a hydrophilic group, oligomers having a perfluoroalkyl group and an oleophilic group, oligomers having a perfluoroalkyl group, a hydrophilic group and an oleophilic group,
  • the surfactants may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 10% by weight, more preferably from 0.01 to 7% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • a hydrophilic polymer may be incorporated into the photosensitive layer in order to improve the developing property and dispersion stability of microcapsule.
  • the hydrophilic polymer include those having a hydrophilic group, for example, a hydroxy group, a carboxyl group, a carboxylate group, a hydroxyethyl group, a polyoxyethyl group, a hydroxypropyl group, a polyoxypropyl group, an amino group, an aminoethyl group, an aminopropyl group, an ammonium group, an amido group, a carboxymethyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
  • hydrophilic polymer examples include gum arabic, casein, gelatin, a starch derivative, carboxymethyl cellulose or a sodium salt thereof, cellulose acetate, sodium alginate, a vinyl acetate-maleic acid copolymer, a styrene-maleic acid copolymer, polyacrylic acid or a salt thereof, polymethacrylic acid or a salt thereof, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl acrylate, polyethylene glycol, a hydroxypropylene polymer, polyvinyl alcohol,
  • the hydrophilic polymer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 5,000 or more, more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000.
  • the hydrophilic polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer or the like.
  • the content of the hydrophilic polymer in the photosensitive layer is preferably 20% by weight or less, more preferably 10% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • a dye having large absorption in the visible light region can be used as a coloring agent for the image.
  • Specific examples thereof include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, Oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (CI42555), Methyl Violet (CI42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI45170B), Malachite Green (CI42000), Methylene Blue (CI52015), and dyes described in JP-A-62-293247 .
  • a pigment for example, phthalocyanine-based pigment, azo-based pigment, carbon black and titanium oxide can be preferably used.
  • the amount of the coloring agent added is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • a compound capable of undergoing discoloration by the effect of an acid or a radical can be added in order to form a print-out image.
  • various dyes e.g., diphenylmethane-based, triphenylmethane-based, thiazine-based, oxazine-based, xanthene-based, anthraquinone-based, iminoquinone-based, azo-based and azomethine-based dyes are effectively used.
  • dyes for example, Brilliant Green, Ethyl Violet, Methyl Green, Crystal Violet, Basic Fuchsine, Methyl Violet 2B, Quinaldine Red, Rose Bengale, Metanil Yellow, Thymolsulfophthalein, Xylenol Blue, Methyl Orange, Paramethyl Red, Congo Red, Benzopurpurine 4B, ⁇ -Naphthyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malachite Green, Parafuchsine, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (produced by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), Oil Blue #603 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Pink #312 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red 5B (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Scarlet #308 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red OG (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red RR (produced by Orient
  • leuco dyes known as a material for heat-sensitive paper or pressure-sensitive paper include Crystal Violet Lactone, Malachite Green Lactone, Benzoyl Leuco Methylene Blue, 2-(N-phenyl-N-methylamino)-6-(N-p-tolyl-N-ethyl)aminofluorane, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6-(N-ethyl-p-toluidino)fluorane, 3,6-dimethoxyfluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-5-methyl-7-(N,N-dibenzylamino)fluorane, 3-(N-cyclohexyl-N-methylamino)-6-methyl-7-aniliaofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-xylidino
  • the dye capable of undergoing discoloration by the effect of an acid or a radical is preferably added in an amount of 0.01 to 15% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • a small amount of a thermal polymerization inhibitor is preferably added in order to prevent the polymerizable compound from undergoing undesirable thermal polymerization during the production or preservation of the photosensitive layer.
  • thermal polymerization inhibitor examples include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butyl catechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol) and N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt.
  • the amount of the thermal polymerization inhibitor added is preferably from about 0.01 to about 5% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • a higher fatty acid derivative e.g., behenic acid or behenic acid amide may be added and localized on the surface of the photosensitive layer during the process of drying after coating in order to avoid polymerization inhibition due to oxygen.
  • the amount of the higher fatty acid derivative added is preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer according to the invention may contain a plasticizer.
  • the plasticizer include a phthalic acid ester, for example, dimethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, diisobutyl phthalate, diocyl phthalate, octyl capryl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, ditridecyl phthalate, butyl benzyl phthalate, diisodecyl phthalate or diallyl phthalate; a glycol ester, for example, dimethyl glycol phthalate, ethyl phthalylethyl glycolate, methyl phthalylethyl glycolate, butyl phthalylbutyl glycolate or triethylene glycol dicaprylic acid ester; a phosphoric acid ester, for example, tricresyl phosphate or triphenyl phosphate; an aliphatic dibasic acid ester, for example, di
  • the photosensitive layer according to the invention may contain fine inorganic particle in order to increase strength of the cured layer in the image area.
  • the fine inorganic particle preferably includes, for example, silica, alumina, magnesium oxide, titanium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium alginate and a mixture thereof. Even if the fine inorganic particle has no light-to-heat converting property, it can be used, for example, for strengthening the layer or enhancing interfacial adhesion property due to surface roughening.
  • the fine inorganic particle preferably has an average particle size from 5 nm to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.5 to 3 ⁇ m. In the range described above, it is stably dispersed in the photosensitive layer, sufficiently maintains the film strength of the photosensitive layer and can form the non-image area excellent in hydrophilicity and preventing from the occurrence of stain at the printing.
  • the fine inorganic particle described above is easily available as a commercial product, for example, colloidal silica dispersion.
  • the content of the fine inorganic particle is preferably 20% by weight or less, more preferably 10% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer according to the invention may contain a hydrophilic low molecular weight compound in order to improve the developing property.
  • the hydrophilic low molecular weight compound includes a water-soluble organic compound, for example, a glycol compound, e.g., ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol or tripropylene glycol, or an ether or ester derivative thereof, a polyhydroxy compound, e.g., glycerine or pentaerythritol, an organic amine, e.g., triethanol amine, diethanol amine or monoethanol amine, or a salt thereof, an organic sulfonic acid, e.g., toluene sulfonic acid or benzene sulfonic acid, or a salt thereof, an organic phosphonic acid, e.g., phenyl phosphonic acid, or a salt thereof, an organic carboxylic acid, e.g.
  • the photosensitive layer according to the invention is formed by dispersing or dissolving each of the necessary constituting components described above in a solvent to prepare a coating solution and coating the solution.
  • the solvent used include, for example, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-methxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, dimethoxyethane, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetramethylurea, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, ⁇ -butyrolactone, toluene and water, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • the solvents may be used individually or as a
  • the photosensitive layer according to the invention may also be formed by preparing plural coating solutions by dispersing or dissolving the same or different components described above into the same or different solvents and conducting repeatedly plural coating and drying.
  • the coating amount (solid content) of the photosensitive layer after the coating and drying on the support may be varied depending on the use but ordinarily, it is preferably from 0.3 to 3.0 g/m 2 . In the range described above, the preferable sensitivity and good film property of the photosensitive layer can be obtained.
  • Various methods can be used for the coating. Examples of the method include bar coater coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating.
  • a protective layer (oxygen-blocking layer) is preferably provided on the photosensitive layer in order to prevent diffusion and penetration of oxygen which inhibits the polymerization reaction at the time of exposure.
  • the protective layer for use in the invention preferably has oxygen permeability (A) at 25°C under one atmosphere of 1.0 ⁇ (A) ⁇ 20 (ml/m 2 ⁇ day), When the oxygen permeability (A) is extremely lower than 1.0 (ml/m 2 ⁇ day), problems may occur in that an undesirable polymerization reaction arises during the production or preservation before image exposure and in that undesirable fog or spread of image line occurs at the image exposure.
  • the oxygen permeability (A) greatly exceeds 20 (ml/m 2 ⁇ day), decrease in sensitivity may be incurred.
  • the oxygen permeability (A) is more preferably in a range of 1.5 ⁇ (A) ⁇ 12 (ml/m 2 ⁇ day), still more preferably in a range of 2.0 ⁇ (A) ⁇ 10.0 (ml/m 2 ⁇ day).
  • the protective layer does not substantially hinder the transmission of light for the exposure, is excellent in the adhesion property to the photosensitive layer, and can be easily removed during a development step after the exposure. Contrivances on the protective layer have been heretofore made and described in detail in U.S. Patent 3,458,311 and JP-B-55-49729 .
  • a water-soluble polymer compound relatively excellent in crystallizability is preferably used as the material of the protective layer.
  • a water-soluble polymer for example, polyvinyl alcohol, vinyl alcohol/vinyl phthalate copolymer, vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol/vinyl phthalate copolymer, vinyl acetate/crotonic acid copolymer, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acidic cellulose, gelatin, gum arabic, polyacrylic acid or polyacrylamide is enumerated.
  • the water-soluble polymer compounds may be used individually or as a mixture. Of the compounds, when polyvinyl alcohol is used as a main component, the best results can be obtained in the fundamental characteristics, for example, oxygen-blocking property and removability of the protective layer by development.
  • Polyvinyl alcohol for use in the protective layer may be partially substituted with ester, ether or acetal as long as it contains unsubstituted vinyl alcohol units for achieving the necessary oxygen-blocking property and water solubility. Also, a part of polyvinyl alcohol may have other copolymer component. As specific examples of the polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl alcohols having a hydrolysis degree of 71 to 100% and a polymerization repeating unit number of 300 to 2,400 are exemplified.
  • the content of polyvinyl alcohol in the protective layer is from 20 to 95% by weight, more preferably from 30 to 90% by weight.
  • modified polyvinyl alcohol can be preferably used.
  • polyvinyl alcohols of various polymerization degrees having at random a various kind of hydrophilic modified cites for example, an anion-modified cite modified with an anion, e.g., a carboxyl group or a sulfo group, a cation-modified cite modified with a cation, e.g., an amino group or an ammonium group, a silanol-modified cite or a thiol-modified cite, and polyvinyl alcohols of various polymerization degrees having at the terminal of the polymer a various kind of modified cites, for example, the above-described anion-modified cite, cation modified cite, silanol-modified cite or thiol-modified cite, an alkoxy-modified cite, a sulfide-modified cite, an ester modified cite of vinyl alcohol with a various kind of
  • polyvinyl pyrrolidone or a modified product thereof is preferable from the viewpoint of the oxygen-blocking property and removability by development.
  • the content thereof is ordinarily from 3.5 to 80% by weight, preferably from 10 to 60% by weight, more preferably from 15 to 30% by weight, in the protective layer.
  • the components of the protective layer selection of PVA and use of additives
  • the coating amount are determined taking into consideration fog-preventing property, adhesion property and scratch resistance besides the oxygen-blocking property and removability by development.
  • the higher the hydrolyzing rate of the PVA used the higher the unsubstituted vinyl alcohol unit content in the protective layer
  • the molecular weight of the polymer compound for example, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) is ordinarily from 2,000 to 10,000,000, preferably from 20,000 to 3,000,000.
  • glycerin, dipropylene glycol or the like can be added in an amount corresponding to several % by weight of the polymer compound to provide flexibility.
  • an anionic surfactant for example, sodium alkylsulfate or sodium alkylsulfonate
  • an amphoteric surfactant for example, alkylaminocarboxylate and alkylaminodicarboxylate
  • a nonionic surfactant for example, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether can be added in an amount corresponding to several % by weight of the polymer compound.
  • the adhesion property of the protective layer to the photosensitive layer and scratch resistance are also extremely important in view of handling of the printing plate precursor. Specifically, when a hydrophilic layer comprising a water-soluble polymer is laminated on the oleophilic photosensitive layer, layer peeling due to an insufficient adhesion property is liable to occur, and the peeled portion causes such a defect as failure in curing of the photosensitive layer due to polymerization inhibition by oxygen.
  • Various proposals have been made for improving the adhesion property between the photosensitive layer and the protective layer. For example, it is described in U.S. Patent Application Nos.
  • a sufficient adhesion property can be obtained by mixing from 20 to 60% by weight of an acryl-based emulsion or a water-insoluble vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer with a hydrophilic polymer mainly comprising polyvinyl alcohol and laminating the resulting mixture on the photosensitive layer.
  • Any of these known techniques can be applied to the protective layer according to the invention. Coating methods of the protective layer are described in detail, for example, in U.S. Patent 3,458,311 and JP-B-55-49729 .
  • an inorganic stratiform compound into the protective layer of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention for the purpose of improving the oxygen-blocking property and property for protecting the surface of photosensitive layer.
  • the inorganic stratiform compound used here is a particle having a thin tabular shape and includes, for instance, mica, for example, natural mica represented by the following formula: A (B, C) 2-5 D 4 O 10 (OH, F, O) 2 , (wherein A represents any one of K, Na and Ca, B and C each represents any one of Fe (II), Fe(III), Mn, Al, Mg and V, and D represents Si or Al) or synthetic mica; talc represented by the following formula: 3MgO ⁇ 4SiO ⁇ H 2 O; teniolite; montmorillonite; saponite; hectolite; and zirconium phosphate.
  • mica for example, natural mica represented by the following formula: A (B, C) 2-5 D 4 O 10 (OH, F, O) 2 , (wherein A represents any one of K, Na and Ca, B and C each represents any one of Fe (II), Fe(III), Mn, Al, Mg and V, and D represents Si or Al) or
  • examples of the natural mica include muscovite, paragonite, phlogopite, biotite and lepidolite.
  • examples of the synthetic mica include non-swellable mica, for example, fluorphlogopite KMg 3 (AlSi 3 O 10 )F 2 or potassium tetrasilic mica KMg 2.5 (Si 4 O 10 )F 2 , and swellable mica, for example, Na tetrasilic mica NaM 2.5 (Si 4 O 10 )F 2 , Na or Li teniolite (Na, Li)Mg 2 Li(Si 4 O 10 )F 2 , or montmorillonite based Na or Li hectolite (Na, Li) 1/8 Mg 2/5 Li) 1/8 (Si 4 O 10 )F 2 . Synthetic smectite is also useful.
  • fluorine based swellable mica which is a synthetic inorganic stratiform compound
  • the swellable synthetic mica and an swellable clay mineral for example, montmorillonite, saponite, hectolite or bentonite have a stratiform structure comprising a unit crystal lattice layer having thickness of approximately 10 to 15 angstroms, and metallic atom substitution in the lattices thereof is remarkably large in comparison with other clay minerals.
  • the lattice layer results in lack of positive charge and in order to compensate it, a cation, for example, Na + , Ca 2+ or Mg 2+ , is adsorbed between the lattice layers.
  • the cation existing between the lattice layers is referred to as an exchangeable cation and is exchangeable with various cations.
  • the cation between the lattice layers is Li+ or Na +
  • because of a small ionic radius because of a small ionic radius, a bond between the stratiform crystal lattices is week, and the inorganic stratiform compound greatly swells upon contact with water.
  • the stratiform crystal lattices are easily cleaved to form a stable sol in water.
  • the bentnite and swellable synthetic mica have strongly such tendency and are useful in the invention.
  • the swellable synthetic mica is preferably used.
  • an aspect ratio of the inorganic stratiform compound is ordinarily 20 or more, preferably 100 or more, particularly preferably 200 or more.
  • the aspect ratio is a ratio of thickness to major axis of particle and can be determined, for example, from a projection drawing of particle by a microphotography. The larger the aspect ratio, the greater the effect obtained.
  • an average major axis is ordinarily from 0.3 to 20 ⁇ m, preferably from 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m, particularly preferably from 1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • An average thickness of the particle is ordinarily 0.1 ⁇ m or less, preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less, particularly preferably 0.01 ⁇ m or less.
  • thickness is approximately from 1 to 50 nm and plain size is approximately from 1 to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the content of the inorganic stratiform compound in the protective layer is preferably from 5/1 to 1/100 in terms of weight ratio to the amount of binder used in the protective layer.
  • the total amount of the inorganic stratiform compounds fulfills the above-described weight ratio.
  • a swellable stratiform compound that is exemplified as a preferred inorganic stratiform compound is added to 100 parts by weight of water to adapt the compound to water and to be swollen, followed by dispersing using a dispersing machine.
  • the dispersing machine used include, for example, a variety of mills conducting dispersion by directly applying mechanical power, a high-speed agitation type dispersing machine providing a large shear force and a dispersion machine providing ultrasonic energy of high intensity.
  • a dispersion containing from 5 to 10% by weight of the inorganic stratiform compound thus prepared is highly viscous or gelled and exhibits extremely good preservation stability.
  • the dispersion is diluted with water, sufficiently stirred and then mixed with a binder solution.
  • a surfactant for improving coating property for example, a surfactant for improving coating property or a water-soluble plasticizer for improving physical property of coated layer in addition to the inorganic stratiform compound.
  • a water-soluble plasticizer for example, propionamide, cyclohexanediol, glycerin or sorbitol.
  • a water-soluble (meth)acrylic polymer can be added.
  • known additives for increasing adhesion property to the photosensitive layer or for improving preservation stability of the coating solution for example, a surfactant for improving coating property or a water-soluble plasticizer for improving physical property of coated layer in addition to the inorganic stratiform compound.
  • the water-soluble plasticizer include propionamide, cyclohexanediol, glycerin or sorbitol.
  • a water-soluble (meth)acrylic polymer can be added.
  • known additives for increasing adhesion property to the photosensitive layer or for improving preservation stability of the coating solution for example
  • the coating solution for protective layer thus-prepared is coated on the photosensitive layer and dried to form a protective layer.
  • the coating solvent may be appropriately selected in view of the binder used, and when a water-soluble polymer is used, distilled water or purified water is preferably used as the solvent.
  • a coating method of the protective layer is not particularly limited, and known methods, for example, methods described in U.S. Patent 3,458,311 and JP-B-55-49729 can be utilized. Specific examples of the coating method for the protective layer include a blade coating method, an air knife coating method, a gravure coating method, a roll coating method, a spray coating method, a dip coating method and a bar coating method.
  • the coating amount of the protective layer is preferably in a range of 0.05 to 10 g/m 2 in terms of the coating amount after drying.
  • the protective layer contains the inorganic stratiform compound, it is more preferably in a range of 0.1 to 0.5 g/m 2
  • the protective layer does not contain the inorganic stratiform compound, it is more preferably in a range of 0.5 to 5 g/m 2 .
  • a backcoat layer may be provided on the back surface of the support, if desired.
  • the backcoat layer preferably includes, for example, a coating layer comprising an organic polymer compound described in JP-A-5-45885 and a coating layer comprising a metal oxide obtained by hydrolysis and polycondensation of an organic metal compound or an inorganic metal compound described in JP-A-6-35174 .
  • a coating layer comprising an organic polymer compound described in JP-A-5-45885 and a coating layer comprising a metal oxide obtained by hydrolysis and polycondensation of an organic metal compound or an inorganic metal compound described in JP-A-6-35174 .
  • an alkoxy compound of silicon for example, Si(OCH 3 ) 4 , Si(OC 2 H 5 ) 4 , Si(OC 3 H 7 ) 4 or Si(OC 4 H 9 ) 4 is preferred since the starting material is inexpensive and easily available.
  • the image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor contains a heat fusible fine particle.
  • the heat fusible fine particle may be a fused form, that is, may have a structure of a latex film.
  • a heat fusible polymer fine particle is preferable.
  • the polymer for forming the fine particle include a homopolymer or copolymer obtained from a monomer, for example, ethylene, styrene, vinyl chloride, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, vinylidene chloride, acrylonitrile or vinyl carbazole and a mixture thereof.
  • a monomer for example, ethylene, styrene, vinyl chloride, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, vinylidene chloride, acrylonitrile or vinyl carbazole and a mixture thereof.
  • polystyrene and polymethyl methacrylate are preferable.
  • the fine particle can be produced, for example, by an emulsion polymerization, a suspension polymerization, a method (solvent evaporation method) wherein a polymer is dissolved in an organic solvent, the solution is emulsified and dispersed in water and then the solvent is evaporated or a mechanical dispersion method.
  • heat fusible polymer for forming the heat fusible fine particle for use in the invention a polymer having a functional group (heat reactive group) reacting by heat is also used.
  • the polymer having the heat reactive group is preferable in view of forming a strong image.
  • the heat reactive group examples include an ethylenically unsaturated group (for example, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allyl group) for conducting a polymerization reaction, an isocyanato group or a blocked isocyanato group and as a reaction partner, a functional group (for example, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a carboxyl group) having an active hydrogen atom for conducting an addition reaction, an epoxy group and as a reaction partner, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a carboxyl group for conducting an addition reaction, a carboxyl group and a hydroxy group or an amino group for conducting a condensation reaction, and an acid anhydride and an amino group or a hydroxy group for conducting a ring-opening addition reaction.
  • any functional group for conducting a reaction may be used as long as the functional group can form a chemical bond by heat fusion.
  • the introduction of the heat reactive group into a polymer particle may be carried out at the time of polymerization of fine particulate polymer or may be carried out using a polymer reaction after the polymerization of fine particulate polymer.
  • a monomer having the heat reactive group is subjected to emulsion polymerization or suspension polymerization
  • the monomer having such a functional group include allyl methacrylate, allyl acrylate, vinyl methacrylate, vinyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate or its blocked isocyanato, for example, with an alcohol, 2-isocyanatoethyl acrylate or its blocked isocyanato, for example, with an alcohol, 2-aminoethyl methacrylate, 2-aminoethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic anhydride, a difunctional acrylate and a difunctinal methacrylate, but
  • the heat reactive group in the case of introducing the heat reactive group at the time of polymerization, it is also possible to copolymerize a monomer having no such a heat reactive group with the monomer having the heat reactive group.
  • the copolymerizable monomer having no such a heat reactive group include styrene, alkyl acrylate, alkyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile and vinyl acetate, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto and any monomer having no such a heat reactive group may be used.
  • the polymerization reaction using for the case of introduction of the heat reactive group after the polymerization of fine particulate polymer includes, for example, polymer reactions described in WO 96/34316 .
  • the weight average molecular weight of any of the polymer fine particle having no heat reactive group and the polymer fine particle having heat reactive group is suitably in a range of 2,000 to 1,000,000.
  • the average particle size of the polymer fine particle is preferably from 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.03 to 1.00 ⁇ m, particularly preferably from 0.05 to 0.40 ⁇ m, from the standpoint of achieving a good balance between the image-forming property and developing property.
  • the polymer fine particle contains a light-to-heat converting agent because of good heat efficiency at the time of exposure.
  • the polymer fine particle containing a light-to-heat converting agent can be obtained by dissolving the light-to-heat converting agent together with the polymer in a water-insoluble organic solvent in the solvent evaporation method described above.
  • a hydrophilic resin may be added to the image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • the hydrophilic resin By the addition of the hydrophilic resin, not only the developing property in an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 but also the film strength of the image-forming layer per se are improved.
  • a hydrophilic resin having no three-dimensional crosslinkage structure is preferable as the hydrophilic resin because of good developing property.
  • the hydrophilic resin include resins having a hydrophilic group, for example, a hydroxy group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyethyl group, a hydroxypropyl group, an amino group, an aminoethyl group, an aminopropyl group and a carboxymethyl group.
  • hydrophilic resin examples include arabic gum, casein, gelatin, a starch derivative, soya gum, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose or sodium salt thereof, cellulose acetate, sodium alginate, a vinyl acetate-maleic acid copolymer, a styrene-maleic acid copolymer, polyacrylic acid or a salt thereof, polymethacrylic acid or a salt thereof, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or cop
  • the amount of the hydrophilic resin added to the image-forming layer is preferably from 2 to 40% by weight, more preferably from 3 to 30% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer from the standpoint of good developing property and high printing durability.
  • a light-to-heat converting agent which absorbs light to generate heat
  • an inorganic fine particle e.g., a surfactant, a coloring agent or a plasticizer, if desired, in addition to the resin fine particle and hydrophilic resin, for various purposes, for example, of improving sensitivity, controlling degree of hydrophilicity, improving physical strength of the image-forming layer, improving mutual dispersibility of components constituting the layer, improving coating property, improving printing aptitude, or increasing workability in plate making.
  • the compounds added are described below.
  • the light-to-heat converting agent may be a substance capable of absorbing light of 700 nm or more and various pigments, dyes and metal fine particles can be used. Specific examples of the light-to-heat converting agent include the inferred absorbing agents described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • the inorganic fine particle include silica, alumina, magnesium oxide, titanium oxide, magnesium carbonate, potassium alginate and a mixture thereof.
  • the inorganic fine particle can be used for strengthening film or increasing an interfacial adhesion property due to surface roughening even if it does not have the light-to-heat converting property.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic fine particle is preferably from 5 nm to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 10 nm to 1 ⁇ m. In the range of the average particle size described above, the inorganic fine particle is stably dispersed together with the resin fine particle and metal fine particle as the light-to-heat converting agent in the hydrophilic resin to sufficiently maintain the film strength of the image-forming layer and to form the non-image area excellent in the hydrophilicity and prevented from printing stain.
  • the inorganic fine particle is easily available as a commercial product, for example, colloidal silica dispersion.
  • the content of the inorganic fine particle in the image-forming layer is preferably from 1.0 to 70% by weight, more preferably from 5.0 to 50% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • a surfactant for example, a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant as described in JP-A-2-195396 , a fluorine-containing surfactant or an amphoteric surfactant as described in JP-A-59-121044 and JP-A-4-13149 , in order to enlarge stability against the variations of printing conditions.
  • a surfactant for example, a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant as described in JP-A-2-195396 , a fluorine-containing surfactant or an amphoteric surfactant as described in JP-A-59-121044 and JP-A-4-13149 , in order to enlarge stability against the variations of printing conditions.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.05 to 15% by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 5% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • a dye having large absorption in the visible light region can be used as a coloring agent for the image in the image-forming layer.
  • the coloring agent include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, Oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (C142555), Methyl Violet (CI42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI45170B), Malachite Green (CI42000), Methylene Blue (CI52015), and dyes described in JP-A-62-293247 .
  • a pigment for example, phthalocyanine-based pigment, azo-based pigment and titanium oxide can be preferably used.
  • the amount of the coloring agent added is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by weight based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • a plasticizer may be added to the image-forming layer in order to impart flexibility or the like of the coated film.
  • polyethylene glycol, tributyl citrate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, dihexyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, trioctyl phosphate or tetrahydrofurfuryl oleate is used.
  • the image-forming layer is formed by dissolving or dispersing each of the necessary constituting components described above in water or a mixed solvent including an organic solvent, if desired, to prepare a coating solution and coating the solution.
  • the solid concentration of the coating solution is preferably from 1 to 50% by weight.
  • the coating amount (solid content) of the image-forming layer after the coating and drying on the support may be varied depending on the use but ordinarily, it is preferably from 0.5 to 5.0 g/m 2 , more preferably from 0.5 to 2.0 g/m 2 .
  • the concentration of the solid content of the image-forming layer in the coating solution is preferably from 2 to 20% by weight, more preferably from 5 to 15% by weight. In the range described above, good dispersibility of the fine particle in the coating solution and good fusion of the polymer fine particle after coating and drying the coating solution to from the image-forming layer.
  • a hydrophilic layer may be provided between the support and the image-forming layer.
  • a preferable hydrophilic layer is a hydrophilic layer which is three-dimensionally crosslinked, is not dissolved in dampening water at lithographic printing using dampening water and/or ink and contains a colloid shown below.
  • a colloid comprising a sol-gel conversion system of an oxide or hydroxide of beryllium, magnesium, aluminum, silicon, titanium, boron, germanium, tin, zirconium, iron, vanadium, antimony or a transition metal is used.
  • a colloid comprising a complex of the elements is also used, The colloid has the structure including the network structure formed by the element described above through an oxygen atom and the unbonded hydroxy group or alkoxy group in mixture.
  • a hydrophilic overcoat layer can be provided on the image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention for protecting the hydrophilic surface of image-forming layer from contamination due to a lipophilic substance during the preservation or finger mark contamination due to touch with finger at the handling.
  • hydrophilic overcoat layer a layer same as the protective layer described for the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor can be used.
  • a light-to-heat converting agent which absorbs infrared ray to generate heat to at least one of the image-forming layer, hydrophilic layer and overcoat layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • the polarity conversion type image-forming layer is an image-forming layer having a property capable of changing hydrophilicity-hydrophobicity in the exposed area by laser exposure and it includes two types image-forming layers, specifically, (1) a negative type image-forming layer having a property changing from hydrophilic to hydrophobic by the laser exposure and (2) a positive type image-forming layer having a property changing from hydrophobic to hydrophilic by the laser exposure.
  • a negative type image-forming layer having a property changing from hydrophilic to hydrophobic by the laser exposure
  • a positive type image-forming layer having a property changing from hydrophobic to hydrophilic by the laser exposure.
  • image-forming layers described, for example, in JP-A-2000-122272 are preferably used.
  • image-forming layer of such a type a layer containing a binder polymer having a specific functional group, particularly, at least any group selected from a carboxylic acid group and carboxylate group capable of undergoing decarboxylation by heat is preferable.
  • the polymer having at least any group selected from a carboxylic acid group and carboxylate group capable of undergoing decarboxylation by heat is not particularly restricted and polymers represented by formulae (1) and (2) shown below are preferable.
  • X represents a group selected from elements of group 4 to group 6, oxides thereof, sulfides thereof, selenides thereof and tellurides thereof
  • P represents a polymer main chain
  • L represents a divalent connecting group
  • R 1 and R 2 which may be the same or different, each represents a monovalent group
  • M represents a group selected from an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal and an onium.
  • R 1 and R 2 each preferably includes a straight-chain alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms and a cyclic alkyl group having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • L preferably includes structural units shown below and combinations thereof.
  • X preferably includes -CO-, -SO- and -SO 2 -.
  • M preferably includes a metal cation of monovalent to tetravalent and an ammonium salt represented by formula (3) shown below.
  • R 4 , R 5 , R 6 and R 7 which may be the same or different, each represents a monovalent group.
  • the polymer main chain skeleton represented by P is not particularly restricted and preferably includes, for example, a (meth)acrylic resin and a urethane resin.
  • the binder polymer used in the image-forming layer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or more, more preferably in a range of 5,000 to 300,000, and a number average molecular weight of 800 or more, more preferably in a range of 1,000 to 250,000.
  • the polydispersity is preferably 1 or more, more preferably in a range of 1.1 to 10.
  • the binder polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer and the like, and it is preferably a random polymer.
  • the content of the binder polymer is ordinarily from 50 to 95% by weight, preferably from 70 to 90% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • the content is less than 50% by weight, the printing image may become unclear in some cases, whereas the content exceeds 95% by weight, the formation of image by laser exposure may not be sufficiently performed in some cases.
  • the image-forming layer may contain other constituting components, if desired, in addition to the binder polymer described above as long as the effects of the invention are not damaged.
  • the constituting component other than the binder polymer include various additives, for example, the polymerizable compound, sensitizing dye and polymerization initiator as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor and the heat fusible fine particle, light-to-heat converting agent, hydrophilic polymer, inorganic fine particle, surfactant, coloring agent and plasticizer as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • image-forming layers described, for example, in JP-A-11-174685 are preferably used.
  • a layer containing a hydrophobic binder polymer (hereinafter, also referred to as a "heat-sensitive binder polymer") having a specific functional group and changing to hydrophilic upon energy generated by laser exposure is preferable.
  • the heat-sensitive binder polymer is a binder polymer which ordinarily does not exhibit affinity for water, for example, water-soluble or water-swellable property, but exhibits the affinity for water, for example, water-soluble or water-swellable property, when the its structure is partially or wholly changed by heat.
  • Examples of such a polymer include a hydrophobic binder polymer having a functional group represented by any one of formulae (4) to (8) shown below in its side chain.
  • L represents a polyvalent organic group comprising a nonmetallic atom connecting to a main chain of the hydrophobic binder polymer
  • R 1 represents an aryl group, an alkyl group or a cyclic imido group
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently represents an aryl group or an alkyl group
  • R 4 represents an aryl group, an alkyl group or a -SO 2 R 5 group
  • R 5 represents an aryl group or an alkyl group
  • R 6 , R 7 and R 8 each independently represents an aryl group or an alkyl group, or appropriate two or three of R 6 , R 7 and R 8 may combined with each other to from a ring
  • one of R 9 and R 10 represents a hydrogen atom and the other represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group
  • R 11 represents an alkyl group
  • R 9 and R 11 or R 10 and R 11 may be combined with each other to from a ring.
  • the polyvalent connecting group comprising a nonmetallic atom for L comprises from 1 to 60 carbon atoms, from 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, from 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, from 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms and from 0 to 20 sulfur atoms.
  • L includes the structural unit described for the preferable examples of L in formula (1) or (2) above and combinations thereof.
  • the heat-sensitive binder polymer used in the image-forming layer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or more, more preferably in a range of 5,000 to 300,000, and a number average molecular weight of 800 or more, more preferably in a range of 1,000 to 250,000.
  • the polydispersity is preferably 1 or more, more preferably in a range of 1.1 to 10.
  • the binder polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer and the like, and it is preferably a random polymer.
  • the content of the heat-sensitive binder polymer is ordinarily from 50 to 95% by weight, preferably from 70 to 90% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • the content is less than 50% by weight, the printing image may become unclear in some cases, whereas the content exceeds 95% by weight, the formation of image by laser exposure may not be sufficiently performed in some cases.
  • the image-forming layer may contain other constituting components, if desired, in addition to the binder polymer described above as long as the effects of the invention are not damaged.
  • the constituting component other than the binder polymer include various additives, for example, the polymerizable compound, sensitizing dye and polymerization initiator as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor and the heat fusible fine particle, light-to-heat converting agent, hydrophilic polymer, inorganic fine particle, surfactant, coloring agent and plasticizer as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • An overcoat layer can be provided on the image-forming layer of the polarity conversion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention for protecting the surface of image-forming layer from contamination due to a lipophilic substance during the preservation or finger mark contamination due to touch with finger at the handling.
  • overcoat layer a layer same as the protective layer described for the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor can be used.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention by using the support having a surface, a contact angle value of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more, the adhesion property between the photosensitive layer and the interface of the support is increased so that high printing durability is achieved.
  • the surface of support is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 to decrease the contact angle value of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less so that the lithographic printing plate prepared has good stain resistance in the non-image area at printing.
  • the method of preparing a lithographic printing plate according to the invention mainly comprises exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor, if desired, heating the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor, and treating the lithographic printing plate precursor with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10.
  • aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10.
  • supplying the aqueous solution for example, to supply as a developer or to supply as dampening water is exemplified.
  • the component of the aqueous solution can be appropriately adjusted depending on the embodiment of supplying the aqueous solution.
  • the compound having a functional group X is decomposed to convert a compound having a functional group Y and as a result, the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support can be decreased to 30° or less.
  • the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support after the treatment is preferably 25° or less, more preferably 20° or less.
  • the developer for use in the invention is an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10. It is preferably, for example, water alone or an aqueous solution containing water as a main component (containing 60% by weight or more of water). Particularly, an aqueous solution having the composition similar to that of conventionally known dampening water, an aqueous solution containing a surfactant (for example, an anionic, nonionic, cationic or betaine surfactant) and an aqueous solution containing a water-soluble polymer compound, an inorganic acid and an inorganic acid salt or an organic acid and an organic acid salt are preferable. An aqueous solution containing both a surfactant and a water-soluble polymer compound is especially preferable.
  • the pH of the developer is more preferably from 2 to 7, still more preferably from 2 to 6, particularly preferably from 2 to 5.
  • the anionic surfactant for use in the invention includes, for example, fatty acid salts, abietic acid salts, hydroxyalkanesulfonic acid salts, alkanesulfonic acid salts, dialkylsulfosuccinic acid salts, straight-chain alkylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, branched alkylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts, alkylphenoxypolyoxy ethylene propylsulfonic acid salts, polyoxyethylene alkylsulfophenyl ether salts, N-methyl-N-oleyltaurine sodium salt, N-alkylsulfosuccinic acid monoamide disodium salts, petroleum sulfonic acid salts, sulfated castor oil, sulfated beef tallow oil, sulfate ester slats of fatty acid alkyl ester, alkyl sulfate
  • the cationic surfactant for use in the invention is not particularly limited and conventionally known cationic surfactants can be used.
  • Examples of the cationic surfactant include alkylamine salts, quaternary ammonium salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine salts and polyethylene polyamine derivatives.
  • the nonionic surfactant for use in the invention includes, for example, polyethylene glycol type higher alcohol ethylene oxide addacts, alkylphenol ethylene oxide addacts, fatty acid ethylene oxide addacts, polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester ethylene oxide addacts, higher alkylamine ethylene oxide addacts, fatty acid amide ethylene oxide addacts, ethylene oxide addacts of fat, polypropylene glycol ethylene oxide addacts, dimethylsiloxane-ethylene oxide block copolymers, dimethylsiloxane-(propylene oxide-ethylene oxide) block copolymers, fatty acid esters of polyhydric alcohol type glycerol, fatty acid esters of pentaerythritol, fatty acid esters of sorbitol and sorbitan, fatty acid esters of sucrose, alkyl ethers of polyhydric alcohols and fatty acid amides of alkanolamines.
  • ethylene oxide addacts of sorbitol and/or sorbitan fatty acid esters, polypropylene glycol ethylene oxide addacts, dimethylsiloxane-ethylene oxide block copolymers, dimethylsiloxane-(propylene oxide-ethylene oxide) block copolymers and fatty acid esters of polyhydric alcohols are more preferable.
  • the HLB (hydrophile-lipophile balance) value thereof is preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more.
  • an oxyethylene adduct of acetylene glycol type or acetylene alcohol type or a surfactant for example, a fluorine-based surfactant or a silicon-based surfactant can also be used.
  • betaine surfactant for use in the invention is not particularly restricted and conventionally known betaine surfactants may be used.
  • carboxy betaines, sulfobetaines and phosphobetaine are exemplified.
  • the nonionic surfactant or the betaine surfactant is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the surfactant for use in the developer according to the invention is preferably from 0.01 to 30% by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 20% by weight, particularly preferably from 1 to 15% by weight.
  • the water-soluble polymer compound for use in the developer according to the invention includes, for example, soybean polysaccharide, modified starch, gum arabic, dextrin, a cellulose derivative (for example, carboxymethyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose or methyl cellulose) or a modified product thereof, pllulan, polyvinyl alcohol or a derivative thereof, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylamide, an acrylamide copolymer, a vinyl methyl ether/maleic anhydride copolymer, a vinyl acetate/maleic anhydride copolymer and a styrene/maleic anhydride copolymer.
  • soybean polysaccharide modified starch, gum arabic, dextrin
  • a cellulose derivative for example, carboxymethyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose or methyl cellulose
  • a modified product thereof pllulan
  • polyvinyl alcohol or a derivative thereof polyvinyl pyrrolidone
  • soybean polysaccharide those known can be used.
  • Soyafive (trade name, produced by Fuji Oil Co., Ltd.) is available and various grade products can be used.
  • the soybean polysaccharide preferably used has viscosity in a range from 10 to 100 mPa/sec in a 10% by weight aqueous solution thereof.
  • modified starch known modified starch can be used.
  • the modified starch can be prepared, for example, by a method wherein starch, for example, of corn, potato, tapioca, rice or wheat is decomposed, for example, with an acid or an enzyme to an extent that the number of glucose residue per molecule is from 5 to 30 and then oxypropylene is added thereto in an alkali.
  • the content of the water-soluble polymer compound in the developer is preferably from 0.1 to 20% by weight, more preferably from 0.5 to 10% by weight.
  • the developer according to the invention may also contain an organic solvent.
  • the organic solvent that can be contained in the developer include, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon (e.g., hexane, heptane, Isopar E, Isopar H, Isopar G (produced by Esso Chemical Co., Ltd.), gasoline or kerosene), an aromatic hydrocarbon (e.g., toluene or xylene), a halogenated hydrocarbon (methylene dichloride, ethylene dichloride, trichlene or monochlorobenzene) and a polar solvent.
  • an aliphatic hydrocarbon e.g., hexane, heptane, Isopar E, Isopar H, Isopar G (produced by Esso Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • gasoline or kerosene e.g., toluene or xylene
  • a halogenated hydrocarbon methylene dichloride,
  • the polar solvent examples include an alcohol (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 2-ethyoxyethanol, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methyl phenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol or methylamyl alcohol), a ketone (e.g., acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, ethyl butyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone or cyclohexanone), an ester
  • the organic solvent When the organic solvent is insoluble in water, it may be employed by being solubilized in water using a surfactant or the like.
  • the concentration of the organic solvent is desirably less than 40% by weight in view of safety and inflammability.
  • an inorganic acid and an inorganic salt or an organic acid and an organic acid salt in order to facilitate the decomposition reaction of the polarity conversion compound having a functional group X provided on the support.
  • the inorganic acid and inorganic salt for example, phosphoric acid, methaphosphoric acid, ammonium primary phosphate, ammonium secondary phosphate, sodium primary phosphate, sodium secondary phosphate, potassium primary phosphate, potassium secondary phosphate, sodium tripolyphosphate, potassium pyrophosphate, sodium hexamethaphosphate, magnesium nitrate, sodium nitrate, potassium nitrate, ammonium nitrate, sodium sulfate, potassium sulfate, ammonium sulfate, sodium sulfite, ammonium sulfite, sodium hydrogen sulfate, nickel sulfate, lithium nitrate, copper nitrate, iron nitrate and zinc nitrate are illustrated.
  • organic acid for example, citric acid, acetic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, salicylic acid, caprylic acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, lactic acid, levulinic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, xylenesulfonic acid, phytic acid and an organic phosphonic acid are illustrated.
  • the organic acid may also be used in the form of a metal salt or an ammonium salt.
  • the content of the inorganic acid and inorganic salt or the organic acid and organic acid salt in the developer is preferably from 0.1 to 10% by weight, more preferably from 0.5 to 9% by weight, particularly preferably from 1 to 9% by weight.
  • an antiseptic agent a chelating agent, a defoaming agent, an organic acid or the like can be incorporated in addition to the above components.
  • the antiseptic agent for example, phenol or a derivative thereof, formalin, an imidazole derivative, sodium dehydroacetate, a 4-isothiazolin-3-one derivative, benzisotiazolin-3-one, a benzotriazole derivative, an amidine guanidine derivative, a quaternary ammonium salt, a pyridine derivative, a quinoline derivative, a guanidine derivative, diazine, a triazole derivative, oxazole, an oxazine derivative and a nitro bromo alcohol, e.g., 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, 1,1-dibromo-1-nitro-2-ethanol or 1,1-dibromo-1-nitro-2-propanol are preferably used.
  • a salt of an organic amine is also effectively used in place of the sodium salt or potassium salt in the chelating agents.
  • the defoaming agent for example, a conventional silicone-based self-emulsifying type or emulsifying type defoaming agent, and a nonionic surfactant having HLB of 5 or less are used.
  • the silicone defoaming agent is preferably used. Any of emulsifying dispersing type and solubilizing type can be used.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is preferably exposed imagewise with a laser having an oscillation wavelength of 350 to 1,200 nm.
  • the exposure apparatus for use in the invention may be any of an internal drum system, an external drum system and a flat bed system. Further, the highly accurate image can be recorded at high speed by simultaneously recording the image using a multibeam exposure system.
  • the image-recording can be performed using an FM screen at the exposure of lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor exposed imagewise may be heated overall between the exposure and development, if desired.
  • the heating the image-forming reaction in the photosensitive layer is accelerated to achieve advantages, for example, improvements in the sensitivity and printing durability and stabilization of the sensitivity.
  • the protective layer is provided on the photosensitive layer, it is also preferred to carry out a water washing treatment before the development processing.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is exposed imagewise with a semiconductor laser or a solid laser as described above, if desired, heated the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor as described above, and then subjected to printing by supplying oily ink and an aqueous component without undergoing any development processing step.
  • a method wherein the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed with a laser, heated the entire surface in an oven and then mounted on a printing machine to conduct printing without undergoing the development processing step or a method wherein the lithographic printing plate precursor is mounted on a printing machine, exposed with a laser on the printing machine, heated the entire surface on the printing machine and then subjected to printing without undergoing the development processing step is exemplified.
  • negative type lithographic printing plate precursor of on-machine development type after the imagewise exposure of the lithographic printing plate precursor with a laser, when the aqueous component and oily ink are supplied to conduct printing without undergoing the development processing step, for example, a wet development processing step, in the exposed area of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer cured by the exposure forms the oily ink receptive area having the oleophilic surface.
  • the uncured photosensitive layer is removed by dissolution or dispersion with the aqueous component and/or oily ink supplied to reveal the surface of support in the area.
  • the decrease in the contact angle according to the invention occurs and as a result, the aqueous component adheres on the revealed surface of support and the oily ink adheres to the exposed area of the photosensitive layer, whereby printing is initiated.
  • the aqueous component or oily ink may be supplied at first on the surface of lithographic printing plate precursor, it is preferred to supply the oily ink at first in view of preventing the aqueous component from contamination with the unexposed area of the photosensitive layer.
  • dampening water for conventional lithographic printing or a solution prepared by adding a surfactant, a hydrophilic polymer compound, an inorganic acid and an inorganic acid salt or an organic acid and an organic acid salt to dampening water for conventional lithographic printing is employed.
  • oily ink printing ink for conventional lithographic printing is used.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor is subjected to the on-machine development on a printing machine and used as it is for printing a large number of sheets.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed imagewise with a laser, if desired, heated the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor as described above, and then rubbed a surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with a rubbing member in the presence of the developer having pH of 2 to 10 described above in an automatic processor equipped with the rubbing member to remove the unexposed area of the photosensitive layer, thereby preparing a lithographic printing plate.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed imagewise with a laser, if desired, heated the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor as described above, rubbed a surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with a rubbing member in the presence of the developer having pH of 2 to 10 described above in an automatic processor equipped with the rubbing member to remove the unexposed area of the photosensitive layer, and then another aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as a "hydrophilizing aqueous solution”) is brought into contact with the surface of support revealed by a method, for example, immersion, spray or coating to prepare a lithographic printing plate.
  • a method for example, immersion, spray or coating
  • the developer described above can be used as a developer and a development replenisher for the exposed negative type lithographic printing plate precursor and it is preferably applied to an automatic processor described hereinafter.
  • an automatic processor described hereinafter.
  • the developer becomes fatigued in accordance with the processing amount, and hence the processing ability may be restored using a replenisher or a fresh developer.
  • a replenishment system can be preferably applied to the plate making method of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • the development processing using the aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 according to the invention is preferably performed by an automatic processor equipped with a supplying means for a developer and a rubbing member.
  • an automatic processor there are illustrated an automatic processor in which a lithographic printing plate precursor after image exposure is subjected to a rubbing treatment while it is transporting described in JP-A-2-220061 and JP-A-60-59351 , and an automatic processor in which a lithographic printing plate precursor after image-recording placed on a cylinder is subjected to a rubbing treatment while rotating the cylinder described in U.S. Patents 5,148,746 and 5,568,768 and British Patent 2,297,719 .
  • the automatic processor using a rotating brush roll as the rubbing member is particularly preferred.
  • the rotating brush roller which can be preferably used in the invention can be appropriately selected by taking account, for example, of scratch resistance of the image area and nerve strength of the support of the lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • a known rotating brush roller produced by implanting a brush material in a plastic or metal roller can be used.
  • JP-UM-B as used herein means an "examined Japanese utility model publication”
  • JP-UM-B as used herein means an "examined Japanese utility model publication
  • a plastic fiber for example, a polyester-based synthetic fiber, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate or polybutylene terephthalate; a polyamide-based synthetic fiber, e.g., nylon 6.6 or nylon 6.10; a polyacrylic synthetic fiber, e.g., polyacrylonitrile or polyalkyl (meth)acrylate; and a polyolefin-based synthetic fiber, e.g., polypropylene or polystyrene
  • a brush material having a fiber bristle diameter of 20 to 400 ⁇ m and a bristle length of 5 to 30 mm can be preferably used.
  • the outer diameter of the rotating brush roller is preferably from 30 to 200 mm, and the peripheral velocity at the tip of the brush rubbing the plate surface is preferably from 0.1 to 5 m/sec.
  • the rotary direction of the rotating brush roller for use in the invention may be the same direction or the opposite direction with respect to the transporting direction of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention, but when two or more rotating brush rollers are used in an automatic processor as shown in Fig. 2 , it is preferred that at least one rotating brush roller rotates in the same direction and at least one rotating brush roller rotates in the opposite direction with respect to the transporting direction.
  • the photosensitive layer in the non-image area can be more steadily removed.
  • a technique of rocking the rotating brush roller in the rotation axis direction of the brush roller is also effective.
  • the developer can be used at an appropriate temperature, and is preferably used from 10 to 50°C.
  • the lithographic printing plate after the rubbing treatment may be subsequently subjected to water washing, a drying treatment and an oil-desensitization treatment, if desired.
  • an oil-desensitization treatment a known oil-desensitizing solution can be used.
  • the entire surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor may be heated, if desired, before or during the exposure or between the exposure and the development.
  • the heating By the heating, the image-forming reaction in the photosensitive layer is accelerated and advantages, for example, improvement in the sensitivity and printing durability and stabilization of the sensitivity are achieved.
  • the heating before the development is preferably performed under a mild condition of 150°C or lower. When the temperature is too high, a problem may arise in that undesirable fog occurs in the non-image area.
  • the heating after the development can be performed using a very strong condition.
  • the heat treatment is carried out in a temperature range of 150 to 350°C.
  • the temperature is too low, a sufficient effect of strengthening the image may not be obtained, whereas when it is excessively high, problems of deterioration of the support and thermal decomposition of the image area may occur.
  • the conditions of the heat treatment before the development can be appropriately determined in a range for providing the effects described above.
  • the heating means include a conventional convection oven, an IR irradiation apparatus, an IR laser, a microwave apparatus or a Wisconsin oven.
  • the heat treatment can be conducted by maintaining the printing plate precursor at a plate surface temperature ranging from 70 to 150°C for a period of one second to 5 minutes, preferably at 80 to 140°C for 5 seconds to one minute, more preferably at 90 to 130°C for 10 to 30 seconds.
  • the effects described above are efficiently achieved and an adverse affect, for example, the occurrence of fog in the non-image area due to the heat can be preferably avoided.
  • the development processing step is conducted after the exposure step, preferably after the exposure step and the heat treatment step to prepare a lithographic printing plate.
  • a plate setter used in the exposure step, a heat treatment means used in the heat treatment step and a development apparatus used in the development processing step are connected with each other and the lithographic printing plate precursor is subjected to automatically continuous processing.
  • a plate making line wherein the plate setter and the development apparatus are connected with each other by transport means, for example, a conveyer is illustrated.
  • the heat treatment means may be placed between the plate setter and the development apparatus or the heat treatment means and the development apparatus may constitute a unit apparatus.
  • the plate making line is blinded by a filter, a cover or the like.
  • the entire surface of lithographic printing plate may be exposed to active ray, for example, ultraviolet light to accelerate curing of the image area.
  • active ray for example, ultraviolet light
  • a light source for the entire surface exposure for example, a carbon arc lamp, a mercury lamp, a gallium lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, a tungsten lamp or various laser beams are exemplified.
  • the amount of the entire surface exposure is preferably 10 mJ/cm 2 or more, more preferably 100 mJ/cm 2 or more.
  • Heating may be performed at the same time with the entire surface exposure. By performing the heating, further improvement in the printing durability is recognized.
  • the heating means include a conventional convection oven, an IR irradiation apparatus, an IR laser, a microwave apparatus or a Wisconsin oven.
  • the plate surface temperature at the heating is preferably from 30 to 150°C, more preferably from 35 to 130°C, still more preferably from 40 to 120°C.
  • the entire surface of lithographic printing plate may be heated at high temperature to accelerate curing of the image area.
  • means for the entire surface heating include a conventional convection oven, an IR irradiation apparatus, an IR laser, a microwave apparatus or a Wisconsin oven.
  • the plate surface temperature at the heating is preferably from 150 to 350°C, more preferably from 175 to 325°C, still more preferably from 200 to 300°C.
  • An aluminum plate (material: JIS A1050) having a thickness of 0.3 mm was subjected to a degrease treatment with an aqueous 10% by weight sodium aluminate solution at 50°C for 30 seconds in order to remove rolling oil on the surface thereof. Thereafter, the aluminum plate surface was grained using three nylon brushes implanted with bundled bristles having a diameter of 0.3 mm and an aqueous suspension (specific gravity: 1.1 g/cm 3 ) of pumice having a median diameter of 25 ⁇ m, and then thoroughly washed with water.
  • the plate was etched by dipping it in an aqueous 25% by weight sodium hydroxide solution at 45°C for 9 seconds and after washing with water, dipped in an aqueous 20% by weight nitric acid solution at 60°C for 20 seconds, followed by washing with water.
  • the etching amount of the grained surface was about 3 g/m 2 .
  • the aluminum plate was subjected to a continuous electrochemical surface roughening treatment using alternate current voltage of 60 Hz.
  • the electrolytic solution used was an aqueous 1% by weight nitric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) at a liquid temperature of 50°C.
  • the electrochemical surface roughening treatment was performed using a rectangular wave alternate current having a trapezoidal waveform such that the time TP necessary for the current value to reach the peak from zero was 0.8 msec and the duty ratio was 1:1, and disposing a carbon electrode as the counter electrode.
  • the auxiliary anode used was a ferrite.
  • the current density was 30 A/dm 2 in terms of the peak value of current, and 5% of the current flowing from the power source was divided to the auxiliary anode.
  • the quantity of electricity at the nitric acid electrolysis was 175 C/dm 2 when the aluminum plate was serving as the anode. Then, the aluminum plate was washed with water by spraying.
  • the aluminum plate was subjected to an electrochemical surface roughening treatment in the same manner as in the nitric acid electrolysis above using, as the electrolytic solution, an aqueous 0.5% by weight hydrochloric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) at a liquid temperature of 50°C under the conditions that the quantity of electricity was 50 C/dm 2 when the aluminum plate was serving as the anode, and then washed with water by spraying.
  • an aqueous 0.5% by weight hydrochloric acid solution containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion
  • the plate was then treated in an aqueous 15% by weight sulfuric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) as the electrolytic solution at a current density of 15 A/dm 2 to provide a direct current anodic oxide film of 2.5 g/m 2 , thereafter washed with water and dried, thereby preparing Aluminum support 1.
  • sulfuric acid solution containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion
  • the center line average roughness (Ra) of the thus-obtained aluminum support was measured using a stylus having a diameter of 2 ⁇ m and found to be 0.51 ⁇ m.
  • Each of Surface treatment solutions 1 to 5 having the composition shown below was coated on Aluminum support 1 obtained above and dried at 100°C for 3 minutes, The coating amount of the surface treatment layer was 10 mg/m 2 .
  • Each of Supports 1 to 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor was cut in size 3 cm x 3 cm, and immersed in 20 ml of each of Aqueous solutions 1 to 3 having the composition shown below adjusted pH of 3, 5 and 7, respectively, with phosphoric acid and sodium hydroxide at temperature of 25°C for one minute. Then, the support was washed with distilled water and dried at 100°C for one minute to obtain a support for lithographic printing plate precursor subjected to the hydrophilizing treatment.
  • Polarity Conversion Compound (1) 80,000 Polarity Conversion Compound (2): 100,000 Polarity Conversion Compound (3): 60,000 Polarity Conversion Compound (4): 90,000 Polarity Conversion Compound (5): 90,000
  • the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface is decreased from 70° or more to 30° or less by the treatment with any of the aqueous solutions having pH of 3, 5 and 7.
  • the contact angle of water droplet in air is substantially not decreased by the treatment with any of the aqueous solutions having pH of 3, 5 and 7, although the support itself exhibits the contact angle of water droplet in air of 70° or more.
  • Coating solution 1 for photosensitive layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of the supports for lithographic printing plate precursor described above and dried at 80°C for one minute.
  • the coating amount of the photosensitive layer formed was 1.2 g/m 2 .
  • Coating solution 1 for protective layer having the composition shown below was coated on the photosensitive layer using a bar so as to have a dry coating amount of 0.50 g/m 2 and dried at 125°C for 70 seconds to form a protective layer, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5, respectively.
  • Polyvinyl alcohol (saponification degree: 98% by mole; polymerization degree: 500) 40 g Polyvinyl pyrrolidone (molecular weight: 50,000) 5 g Vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate (1/1) copolymer (molecular weight: 70,000) 0.5 g Surfactant (Emalex 710, produced by Nihon-Emulsion Co., Ltd.) 0.5 g Water 950 g
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5 were subjected to imagewise exposure using a semiconductor laser of 405 nm having an output of 100 mW with energy on the surface of plate of 90 ⁇ J/cm 2 .
  • the automatic development processor had two rotating brush rollers.
  • the first brush roller was a brush roller having an outer diameter of 90 mm and being implanted with fiber of polybutylene terephthalate (bristle diameter: 200 ⁇ m, bristle length: 17 mm), and the brush roller was rotated at 200 rpm (peripheral velocity at the tip of brush: 0.94 m/sec) in the same direction as the transporting direction.
  • the second brush roller was a brush roller having an outer diameter of 60 mm and being implanted with fiber of polybutylene terephthalate (bristle diameter: 200 ⁇ m, bristle length: 17 mm), and the brush roller was rotated at 200 rpm (peripheral velocity at the tip of brush: 0.63 m/sec) in the opposite direction to the transporting direction.
  • the transportation of the lithographic printing plate precursor was performed at transporting speed of 100 cm/min.
  • the developer was supplied on the surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor by showering from a spray pipe using a circulation pump.
  • the tank volume for the developer was 10 liters.
  • the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor was put in an oven and heated the entire surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor by blowing hot air to maintain at 110°C for 15 seconds and then the development processing was performed within 30 seconds in the same manner as described above to prepare a lithographic printing plate (with heating).
  • EU-3 etching solution, produced by Fuji Film Co., Ltd.
  • TRANS-G(N) black ink produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.
  • the photosensitive layer was gradually abraded to cause decrease in the ink receptivity, resulting in decrease of ink density on a printed material.
  • a number of printed materials obtained until the ink density (reflection density) decreased by 0.1 from that at the initiation of printing was determined to relatively evaluate the printing durability.
  • the printing durability was calculated according to the formula shown below using the comparative example referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 2 as the criterion (100). As the value increases, the printing durability becomes higher.
  • Printing durability Number of printed materials of subject litographic printing plate / Number of printed materials of criterion litographic printing plate ⁇ 100
  • the 500th sheet of the printed material from the initiation of printing was picked up and the density of ink adhered on the non-image area was measured to relatively evaluate the stain resistance.
  • the stain resistance was calculated according to the formula shown below using the comparative examples referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 2 as the criterion (100). As the value increases, the density of ink adhered on the non-image area decreases, that is, the stain resistance becomes better.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance by the simple processing.
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 6 to 10 were prepared in the same manner as in Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5 except for changing Coating solution I for photosensitive layer to Coating solution 2 for photosensitive layer shown below and changing Coating solution 1 for protective layer to Coating solution 2 for protective layer shown below, respectively.
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 6 to 10 thus-obtained were subjected to the exposure, development and printing in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 12 using Developers 1 to 3 used in the development processing of Examples 1 to 12 and evaluated in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 12.
  • the results are shown in Table 3.
  • the criterion (100) for the relative evaluation the comparative example referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 3 was used.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance by the simple processing.
  • An aluminum plate (material: JIS A1050) having a thickness of 0.3 mm was subjected to surface treatment by performing processes (a) to (k) shown below in this order.
  • Mechanical surface roughening of the aluminum plate was conducted by means of rotating roller-form nylon brushes while supplying a suspension (having specific gravity of 1.12) of an abrasive (silica sand) in water as an abrasion slurry solution to the surface of the aluminum plate.
  • the average particle size of the abrasive was 8 ⁇ m and the maximum particle size was 50 ⁇ m.
  • the material of the nylon brush was 6.10 nylon, and the brush has a bristle length of 50 mm and a bristle diameter of 0.3 mm.
  • the nylon brush was made by making holes in a stainless steel cylinder having a diameter of 300 mm and densely filling the brush bristles. Three of the rotating nylon brushes were used.
  • Two supporting rollers (each having a diameter of 200 mm) provided under the brush rollers were spaced 300 mm.
  • the brush rollers were pressed against the aluminum plate till the load applied to a driving motor for rotating the brush became 7 kw greater than the load before pressing the brush rollers against the aluminum plate.
  • the rotating direction of the brushes was the same as the moving direction of the aluminum plate.
  • the rotation number of the brushes was 200 rpm.
  • Etching treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (sodium hydroxide concentration: 26% by weight, aluminum ion concentration: 6.5% by weight) having temperature of 70°C to dissolve the aluminum plate in an amount of 6 g/m 2 , followed by washing by spraying well water.
  • aqueous sodium hydroxide solution sodium hydroxide concentration: 26% by weight, aluminum ion concentration: 6.5% by weight
  • Desmut treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous 1% by weight nitric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) having temperature of 30°C, followed by washing with water by spraying.
  • the aqueous nitric acid solution used for the desmut treatment was a waste solution of the electrolytic solution from the process of (d) described below.
  • Electrochemical surface roughening treatment of the aluminum plate was continuously conducted by applying 60 Hz alternating current voltage.
  • the electrolytic solution used was an aqueous solution containing 10.5 g/liter of nitric acid (containing 5 g/liter of aluminum ion) and the solution temperature was 50°C.
  • the electrochemical surface roughening treatment was conducted using an alternating current source, which provided a trapezoidal rectangular wave alternating current where time (TP) for reaching the current to its peak from zero was 0.8 msec and a duty ratio was 1:1, and using a carbon electrode as a counter electrode.
  • a ferrite was used as an auxiliary anode.
  • the electrolytic cell used was a radial cell type.
  • the current density was 30 A/dm 2 at the peak current, and the electric amount was 220 C/dm 2 in terms of the total electric quantity during the aluminum plate functioning as an anode.
  • To the auxiliary anode 5% of the current from the electric source was divided. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • Etching treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted at 32°C by spraying an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 26% by weight and an aluminum ion concentration of 6.5% by weight to dissolve the aluminum plate in an amount of 0.20 g/m 2 .
  • the smut component mainly comprising aluminum hydroxide formed in the precedent process of (d) was removed and an edge portion of the pit formed was dissolved to smoothen the edge portion. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • Desmut treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous 15% by weight nitric acid solution (containing 4.5% by weight of aluminum ion) having temperature of 30°C, followed by washing by spraying well water.
  • the aqueous nitric acid solution used for the desmut treatment was a waste solution of the electrolytic solution from the process of (d) described above.
  • Electrochemical surface roughening treatment of the aluminum plate was continuously conducted by applying 60 Hz alternating current voltage.
  • the electrolytic solution used was an aqueous solution containing 7.5 g/liter of hydrochloric acid (containing 5 g/liter of aluminum ion) and the solution temperature was 35°C.
  • the electrochemical surface roughening treatment was conducted using an alternating current source which provided a rectangular wave alternating current and using a carbon electrode as a counter electrode.
  • a ferrite was used as an auxiliary anode.
  • the electrolytic cell used was a radial cell type. The current density was 25 A/dm 2 at the peak current, and the electric amount was 50 C/dm 2 in terms of the total electric quantity during the aluminum plate functioning as an anode. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • Etching treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted at 32°C by spraying an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 26% by weight and an aluminum ion concentration of 6.5% by weight to dissolve the aluminum plate in an amount of 0.10 g/m 2 .
  • the smut component mainly comprising aluminum hydroxide formed in the precedent process of (g) was removed and an edge portion of the pit formed was dissolved to smoothen the edge portion. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • Desmut treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous 25% by weight sulfuric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) having temperature of 60°C, followed by washing by spraying well water.
  • Anodizing treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted using as an electrolytic solution, an aqueous solution having sulfuric acid concentration of 170 g/liter (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) at 43°C.
  • the current density was about 30 A/dm 2 .
  • the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • the amount of the final anodic oxide film was 2.7 g /m 2 .
  • Alkali metal silicate treatment (silicate treatment) of the aluminum plate was conducted by immersing the aluminum plate in an aqueous 1% by weight sodium silicate No. 3 solution having temperature of 30°C for 10 seconds. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water, whereby Aluminum support 2 was prepared. The adhesion amount of the silicate was 3.6 mg/m 2 .
  • Surface Treatment Solution 4 having the composition shown below was coated on Aluminum support 2 obtained above and dried at 100°C for 3 minutes.
  • the coating amount of the surface treatment layer was 7 mg/m 2 .
  • each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor was cut in size 3 cm x 3 cm, and immersed in 20 ml of Developer 2 shown below at 25°C for one minute. Then, the support was washed with distilled water and dried at 100°C for one minute to obtain a support for lithographic printing plate precursor subjected to the hydrophilizing treatment.
  • the contact angle of water droplet in air of each of the supports for lithographic printing plate precursor thus-treated was measured according to the same method as described above. The results are shown in Table 4.
  • Coating solution 3 for photosensitive layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor using a bar and dried in an oven at 70°C for 60 seconds to form a photosensitive layer having a dry coating amount of 1.1 g/m 2 .
  • Coating solution 3 for photosensitive layer was prepared by mixing Photosensitive solution (1) shown below with Microcapsule solution (1) shown below just before coating.
  • Binder Polymer (3) (weight average molecular weight: 100,000) shown below 0.162 g Polymerization Initiator (2) shown below 0.160 g Polymerization Initiator (3) shown below 0.180 g Infrared Absorbing Agent (1) shown below 0.020 g Polymerizable compound (Aronics M-215, produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.) 0.385 g Fluorine-Based Surfactant (1) shown above 0.044 g Methyl ethyl ketone 1.091 g 1-Methoxy-2-propanol 8.210 g
  • Microcapsule (1) prepared as shown below 2.640 g Water 2.425 g
  • an oil phase component 10 g of adduct of trimethylolpropane and xylene diisocyanate (Takenate D-110N, produced by Mitsui Takeda Chemicals, Inc., 75% by weight ethyl acetate solution), 6.00 g of Aronics SR-399 (produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.) and 0.12 g of Pionin A-41C (produced by Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.) were dissolved in 16.67 g of ethyl acetate.
  • As an aqueous phase component 37.5 g of an aqueous 4% by weight PVA-205 solution was prepared.
  • the oil phase component and the aqueous phase component were mixed and the mixture was emulsified using a homogenizer at 12,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
  • the resulting emulsion was added to 25 g of distilled water and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes and then stirred at 40°C for 2 hours.
  • the thus-obtained microcapsule solution was diluted with distilled water to have a solid content concentration of 15% by weight to prepare Microcapsule (1).
  • the average particle diameter of the microcapsule was 0.2 ⁇ m .
  • Coating solution 3 for protective layer having the composition shown below was coated on the photosensitive layer using a bar and dried in an oven at 125°C for 75 seconds to form a protective layer having a dry coating amount of 0.15 g /m 2 , thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 15, respectively.
  • Polyvinyl alcohol (aqueous 6% by weight solution) (PVA 105, produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd., saponification degree: 98.5% by mole; polymerization degree: 500) 2.24 g Polyvinyl pyrrolidone (K 30) (weight average molecular weight: 58,000) 0.0053 g Surfactant (aqueous 1% by weight solution) (Emalex 710, produced by Kao Corp.) 2.15 g Scale-like synthetic mica (aqueous 3.4% by weight dispersion)(MEB 3L, produced by UNICOO Co., Ltd., average particle size: 1 to 5 ⁇ m) 3.75 g Distilled water 10.60 g
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 15 were exposed by Trendsetter 3244VX, produced by Creo Co., equipped with a water-cooled 40 W infrared semiconductor laser under the conditions of output of 9W, a rotational number of an outer surface drum of 210 rpm and resolution of 2,400 dpi.
  • the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor was put in an oven and heated the entire surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor by blowing hot air to maintain at 110°C for 15 seconds and then the development processing was performed within 30 seconds in the same manner as described above to prepare a lithographic printing plate (with heating).
  • Example 7 Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support Contact Angle of Water Droplet in Air (degree) Printing Durability Stain Resistance Before Treatment After Treatment Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating Example 25 11 6 99 15 100 100 1,900 1,900 Example 25 12 7 95 10 100 100 2,000 2,000 Example 26 13 8 105 18 120 120 1,700 1,700 Example 28 14 9 94 10 120 120 2,000 2,000 Comparative Example 7 15 10 110 110 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance by the simple processing.
  • Coating solution 1 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor using a bar and dried in an oven at 100°C for 120 seconds to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1.1 g/m 2 , thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 16 to 20.
  • Heat Decarboxylating Polymer (1) (weight average molecular weight: 50,000) shown below 1.0 g Infrared absorbing agent (NK-3508, produced by Nippon Kankosikiso Kenkyusho K.K.) 0.15 g Megafac F-177 (fluorine-based surfactant, produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.06 g Methyl ethyl ketone 20 g Methyl alcohol 7 g
  • Coating solution 2 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor using a bar and dried in an oven at 80°C for 180 seconds to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1.2 g/m 2 , thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 21 to 25.
  • Heat-Sensitive Polymer Compound (1) (weight average molecular weight: 40,000) shown below 4.0 g Infrared absorbing agent (IR-125, produced by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 0.15 g Acid generator (diphenyliodonium anthraquinonesulfonate) 0.15 g Dye obtained by substituting counter ion of Victoria Pure Blue BOH with 1-naphthalenesulfonic acid 0.05 g Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafac F-177, produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.06 g Methyl ethyl ketone 20 g ⁇ -Butyrolactone 10 g 1-Methoxy-2-propanol 8 g Water 2 g
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor having the polarity conversion type image-forming layer according to the invention can provide improved stain resistance while maintaining good printing durability.
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 25 were exposed by Trendsetter 3244VX, produced by Creo Co., equipped with a water-cooled 40 W infrared semiconductor laser under the conditions of output of 9W, a rotational number of an outer surface drum of 210 rpm and resolution of 2,400 dpi.
  • EU-3 etching solution, produced by Fuji Film Co., Ltd.
  • 11 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
  • Example 38 12 7 100 100 2,000 2,000
  • Example 39 13
  • 8 120 120 1,700 1,700
  • Example 40 14 9 120 120 2,000 2,000 Comparative Example 10
  • 15 100 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
  • Example 41 16 6 100 100 1,900 1,900 Example 42 17 7 100 100 2,000 2,000 Example 43 18 8 120 120 1,700 1,700 Example 44 19 9 120 120 2,000 2,000 Comparative Example 11
  • Example 45 21 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
  • Example 46 22 7 100 100 100 2,000 2,000
  • Example 47 23 8
  • 120 1,700 1,700
  • Example 48 24 9 120 120 2,000 2,000 Comparative Example 12 25
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance also by the simple processing (on-machine development).
  • Coating solution 3 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on Supports 1, 2 and 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor and dried at 35°C for one hour to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1.3 g/m 2 , thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 26 to 28, respectively.
  • Coating solution 4 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on Supports 1, 2 and 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor and dried at 60°C for 2 minutes to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1,3 g/m 2 , thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 29 to 31, respectively.
  • aqueous phase component To the oil phase component was added as an aqueous phase component, 36.0 g of an aqueous 4% by weight polyvinyl alcohol (PVA-205, produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) solution and the mixture was emulsified using a homogenizer at 15,000 rpm for 15 minutes. After adding 24.0 g of water, the emulsion was heated at 40°C for 3 hours to remove the organic solvent. The solid content concentration of the resulting dispersion of novolac resin fine particle was measured and found to be 13.0% by weight. The average particle diameter of the novolac resin fine particle was 0.25 ⁇ m.
  • PVA-205 polyvinyl alcohol
  • Each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 26 to 28 was exposed by a scanning NdYLF infrared laser emitting at 1,050 nm (on the surface of the image-forming layer, scanning speed: 4 m/sec, spot size: 15 ⁇ m and output: 170 mW).
  • each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 29 to 31 was exposed by Trendsetter 3244VFS, produced by Creo Co., equipped with a water-cooled 40 W infrared semiconductor laser under the conditions of output of 9W, a rotational number of an outer surface drum of 210 rpm, energy on the surface of plate of 100 mJ/cm 2 and resolution of 2,400 dpi.
  • Table 7 The results are shown in Table 7.
  • the comparative examples referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 7 were used respectively.
  • the lithographic printing plate precursor having the heat fusion type image-forming layer according to the invention can provide a lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance also by the simple processing.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Thermal Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Photosensitive Polymer And Photoresist Processing (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Printing Plates And Materials Therefor (AREA)

Abstract

A lithographic printing plate precursor includes: a support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more; and a photosensitive layer, wherein the support has a compound having a functional group X on a surface of the support, the functional group X is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of from 2 to 10, so as to decrease the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of the support to 30° or less.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to a lithographic printing plate precursor which is capable of being subjected to a so-called direct plate making, in which the plate making is directly conducted based on digital signals, for example, from a computer using various kinds of lasers, particularly, to a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which does not need alkali development, and a method of preparing a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • A solid laser, semiconductor laser and gas laser having a large output and a small size, which radiate an ultraviolet ray, visible light or infrared ray having a wavelength of 300 to 1,200 nm, have become easily available, and these lasers are very useful for recording light sources used in the direct plate making based on digital signals, for example, from a computer. Various investigations on recording materials sensitive to such various laser beams have been made. Typical examples thereof include firstly recording materials capable of being recorded with an infrared laser having a wavelength of not less than 760 nm, for example, positive type recording materials described in U.S. Patent 4,708,925 and acid catalyst crosslinking type negative type recording materials described in JP-A-8-276558 (the term "JP-A" as used herein means an "unexamined published Japanese patent applieation"), and secondly recording materials responsive to an ultraviolet ray or visible light laser having a wavelength of from 300 to 700 nm, for example, radical polymerization type negative type recording materials described in U.S. Patent 2,850,445 and JP-B-44-20189 (the term "JP-B" as used herein means an "examined Japanese patent publication").
  • Further, with respect to hitherto known lithographic printing plate precursors (hereinafter, also referred to as PS plates), a step of removing the non-image area by dissolution (development processing) is indispensable and a post-processing step, for example, washing the printing plate after the development processing with water, treatment of the printing plate after the development processing with a rinse solution containing a surfactant or treatment of the printing plate after the development processing with an oil-desensitizing solution containing gum arabic or a starch derivative, is also necessary. The point that such additional wet treatments are indispensable is a large subject of investigation in hitherto known PS plates. Even when the first half (image-forming process) of plate making process is simplified by the above-described digital processing, the effects due to the simplification is still insufficient as long as the last half (development processing) is the troublesome wet treatment. Particularly, the consideration for global environment has become a great concern throughout the field of industry in recent years. In view of the consideration for global environment, a treatment with a developer closer to a neutral range and a small amount of waste liquid are subjects of further investigations. Further, it is desirable that the wet type post-processing is simplified or changed to a dry processing.
  • From this viewpoint, as one method for eliminating the processing step, a method referred to as on-machine development (on-press development) wherein an exposed printing plate precursor is mounted on a cylinder of a printing machine and the non-image area of the printing plate precursor is removed by supplying dampening water (fountain solution) and ink while rotating the cylinder is known. Specifically, according to the method, the printing plate precursor is exposed and mounted on a printing machine as it is to complete development processing in a conventional process of printing.
  • A lithographic printing plate precursor suitable for the on-machine development is required to have an image-forming layer soluble in dampening water or an ink solvent and a bright room handling property suitable for development on a printing machine placed in a bright room. However, it is substantially impossible for hitherto known PS plates to fulfill such requirements.
  • In order to fulfill such requirements, a lithographic printing plate precursor having provided on a hydrophilic support an image-forming layer in which fine particles of thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer are dispersed in a hydrophilic binder polymer is proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent 2,938,397 ). In the plate-making, the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed to an infrared laser to agglomerate (fuse) the fine particles of thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer by heat generated by light-to-heat conversion thereby forming an image, and mounted on a cylinder of a printing machine to carry out on-machine development by supplying at least any one of dampening water and ink. Since the lithographic printing plate precursor has the sensitive zone in an infrared region, it has also the handling property in a bright room.
  • However, the image formed by the agglomeration (fusion) of the fine particles of thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer is insufficient in strength and has a problem of printing durability as a printing plate.
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors including microcapsules containing a polymerizable compound incorporated therein in stead of the thermoplastic fine particles are also proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2000-211262 , JP-A-2001-277740 , JP-A-2002-29162 , JP-A-2002-46361 , JP-A-2002-137562 and JP-A-2002-326470 ). In the lithographic printing plate precursors according to such proposals, it is advantageous that the polymer image formed by a reaction of the polymerizable compound is excellent in the strength in comparison with the image formed by the fusion of the fine particles.
  • Also, since the polymerizable compound has high reactivity, many proposals for isolation of the polymerizable compound using microcapsules have been made. Further, it has been proposed to use a thermally degradable polymer in a shell of the microcapsule.
  • However, in the hitherto known lithographic printing plate precursors described in Japanese Patent 2,938,397 , JP-A-2000-211262 , JP-A-2001-277740 , JP-A-2002-29162 , JP-A-2002-46361 , JP-A-2002-137562 and JP-A-2002-326470 , printing durability of the image formed by laser exposure is insufficient so that further improvements have been requested. Specifically, in such a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type, a support having a surface of high hydrophilicity is used in order to make possible development with an aqueous solution having pH of 10 or less or dampening water (ordinarily nearly neutral) on a printing machine and as a result, the image area is apt to be removed from the support by the dampening water during printing so that sufficient printing durability can not be obtained. On the contrary, when the surface of support renders hydrophobic, ink also adheres on the non-image area during printing to cause printing stain. Thus, it is extremely difficult to achieve a good balance between the printing durability and the stain resistance and a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which provides good stain resistance and sufficient printing durability has not yet been known.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a lithographic printing plate precursor capable of being subjected to a direct plate making based on digital data, for example, from a computer, by recording using a solid laser or semiconductor laser radiating an ultraviolet ray, visible light or an infrared ray, particularly, a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which can be developed with an aqueous solution having pH of 10 or less or on a printing machine and provides high printing durability and good stain resistance, and a method of preparing a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • As a result of the intensive investigations, the inventor has found that the above-described object can be achieved by using a support for lithographic printing plate precursor, a surface of which has a contact angle value of water droplet in air of 70° or more and the contact angle of water droplet in air of the surface of which can be decreased to a value of 30° or less by a treatment with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10.
  • Specifically, the present invention includes the following items.
    1. (1) A lithographic printing plate precursor comprising a support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more and a photosensitive layer, wherein the support has on its surface a compound having a functional group X, the functional group X is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, thereby decreasing the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less.
    2. (2) The lithographic printing plate precursor as described in (1) above, wherein the compound having a functional group X is a compound having a functional group represented by the following formula (1):
      Figure imgb0001
      In formula (1), R1 to R3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, -OR11, -SR11, -OCOR11, -OCOOR11, -OCONR11R12, -OSO2R11, -OPO(OR11)(OR12), -OSiR11R12R13, -OPO(OR11)R12, -SCOR11, -NR11R12, -NR11COR12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO2R12, -COR11, -COOR11, -CONR11R12, -SiR11R12R13, -SO2R11, -SO3R11 or -PO(OR11)(OR12), or appropriate two of R1 to R3 may be combined with each other to form a ring, R11 to R13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group or an alkynyl, and * represents a bonding group to a mother skeleton of the compound.
    3. (3) The lithographic printing plate precursor as described in (1) or (2) above, wherein the compound having a functional group X is a polymer compound.
    4. (4) The lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (3) above, wherein the compound having a functional group X has an absorbing group to the support.
    5. (5) The lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (4) above, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a binder polymer having a hydrophilic group.
    6. (6) The lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein the photosensitive layer contains a sensitizing dye having absorption in a wavelength range of 350 to 1,200 nm.
    7. (7) The lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (6) above, which comprises a protective layer on the photosensitive layer.
    8. (8) A method of preparing a lithographic printing plate comprising exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (7) above and then developing the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 to form a non-image area, wherein at the development, the lithographic printing plate precursor is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 to convert the functional group X to the functional group Y, thereby decreasing the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support in the unexposed area to 30° or less.
    9. (9) A method of preparing a lithographic printing plate comprising exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (7) above with a laser having an oscillation wavelength of 350 to 1,200 nm and then developing the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 to remove the photosensitive layer in the unexposed area and to convert the functional group X to the functional group Y, thereby forming a surface of an non-image area having a contact angle of water droplet in air of 30° or less.
    10. (10) The method of preparing a lithographic printing plate as described in (8) or (9) above, wherein the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor is subjected to heat treatment between the imagewise exposure and the development.
    11. (11) A lithographic printing method comprising exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor as described in any one of (1) to (7) above, mounting the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor on a printing machine without carrying out any treatment, and performing printing using printing ink and dampening water having pH of 2 to 10.
  • According to the present invention, a lithographic printing plate precursor which is capable of being subjected to a so-called direct plate making, in which the plate making is directly conducted based on digital signals, for example, from a computer using various kinds of lasers and which provides high printing durability and excellent stain resistance, particularly, a lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type which does not need development with an aqueous alkali solution, and a method of preparing a lithographic printing plate using the lithographic printing plate precursor are obtained.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
    • Fig. 1 is an illustration for schematically showing one example of the aspect in which when the support for lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support decreases.
    • Fig. 2 is an illustration for showing a structure of an automatic development processor.
    • Fig. 3 is an illustration for showing a concept of the θ/2 method using for measurement of the contact angle of water droplet in air.
    [Description of reference numerals and signs]
  • 61:
    Rotating brush roller
    62:
    Backing roller
    63:
    Transport roller
    64:
    Transport guide plate
    65:
    Spray pipe
    66:
    Pipe line
    67:
    Filter
    68:
    Plate supply table
    69:
    Plate discharge table
    70:
    Developer tank
    71:
    Circulating pump
    72:
    Plate
    DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention comprises a photosensitive layer capable of being developed with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 provided on a support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more, and the support has on its surface a compound having a functional group X. The functional group X is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, thereby decreasing the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less.
  • [Support]
  • First, the support for use in the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is described in detail below.
  • The support for use in the invention has a surface exhibiting a contact angle value of water droplet in air of 70° or more and a compound having a functional group X on its surface. The functional group X has a feature in that it is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, thereby decreasing the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less.
  • The support having the compound (hereinafter, also referred to as a "polarity conversion compound") having a functional group X on its surface will be specifically described below.
  • The polarity conversion compound for use in the invention is not particularly restricted as long as it is a compound having the functional group X having the above-described characteristics.
  • As one example of the functional group X, a functional group represented by formula (1) shown below is exemplified.
    Figure imgb0002
  • In formula (1), R1 to R3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, -OR11, -SR11, -OCOR11, -OCOOR11, -OCONR11R12, -OSO2R11, -OPO(OR11)(OR12), -OSiR11R12R13, -OPO(OR11)R12, -SCOR11, -NR11R12, -NR11COR12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO2R12, -COR11, -COOR11, -CONR11R12, -SiR11R12R13, -SO2R11, -SO3R11 or -PO(OR11)(OR12), or appropriate two of R1 to R3 may be combined with each other to form a ring, R11 to R13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group or an alkynyl group, and * represents a bonding group to a mother skeleton of the compound.
  • In formula (1), specific examples of the alkyl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, an undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an eucosyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, an isohexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a 2-methylhexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a 2-norbomyl group, a chloromethyl group, a bromomethyl group, a 2-chloroethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a methoxymethyl group, a methoxyethoxyethyl group, an allyloxymethyl group, a phenoxymethyl group, a methylthiomethyl group, a tolylthiomethyl group, an ethylaminoethyl group, a diethylaminopropyl group, a morpholinopropyl group, an acetyloxymethyl group, a benzoyloxymethyl group, an N-cyclohexylcarbamoyloxyethyl group, an N-phenylearbamoyloxyethyl group, an acetylaminoethyl group, an N-methylbenzoylaminopropyl group, a 2-oxoethyl group, a 2-oxopropyl group, a carboxypropyl group, a methoxycarbonylethyl group, an allyloxycarbonylbutyl group, a chlorophenoxycarbonylmethyl group, a carbamoylmethyl group, an N-methylcarbamoylethyl group, an N,N-dipropylcarbamoylmethyl group, an N-(methoxyphenyl)carbamoylethyl group, an N-methyl-N-(sulfophenyl)carbamoylmethyl group, a sulfobutyl group, a sulfonatobutyl group, a sulfamoylbutyl group, an N-ethylsulfamoylmethyl group, an N,N-dipropylsulfamoylpropyl group, an N-tolylsulfamoylpropyl group, an N-methyl-N-(phosphonophenyl)sulfamoyloctyl group, a phosphonobutyl group, a phosphonatohexyl group, a diethylphosphonobutyl group, a diphenylphosphonopropyl group, a methylphosphonobutyl group, a methylphosphonatobutyl group, a tolylphosphonohexyl group, a tolylphosphonatohexyl group, a phosphonooxypropyl group, a phosphonatooxybutyl group, a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, an α-methylbenzyl group, a 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl group, a p-methylbenzyl group, a cinnamyl group, an allyl group, a 1-propenylmethyl group, a 2-butenyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a 2-methylpropenylmethyl group, a 2-propynyl group, a 2-butynyl group and a 3-butynyl goup.
  • Specific examples of the aryl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, an ethoxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, an acetoxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a phenylthiophenyl group, a methylaminophenyl group, a dimethylaminophenyl group, an acetylaminophenyl group, a carboxyphenyl group, a methoxycarbonylphenyl group, an ethoxycarbonylphenyl group, a phenoxycarbonylphenyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoylphenyl group, a nitrophenyl group, a cyanophenyl group, a sulfophenyl group, a sulfonatophenyl group, a phosphonophenyl group and a phosphonatophenyl group.
  • Specific examples of the alkenyl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 1-butenyl group, a cinnamyl group and a 2-chloro-1-ethenyl group. Specific examples of the alkynyl group represented by any one of R1 to R3 and R11 to R13 include an ethynyl group, a 1-propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group and a trimethylsilylethynyl group.
  • For R1, R2 or R3, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, -OR11, -OCOR11, -OCONR11R12, -OSO2R11, -NR11R12, -NR11COR12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO2R12, -COR11, -COOR11, -CONR11R12, -SO2R11 or -SO3R11 is preferable, and a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, -OR11, -OCOR11, -OCONR11R12, -NR11R12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO2R12, -COR11, -COOR11 or -CONR11R12 is more preferable. It is particularly preferred that at least any one of R2 and R3 is -COR11, -COOR11 or -CONR11R12.
  • In the polarity conversion compound, the amount of the functional group represented by formula (1) is preferably from 0.01 to 50 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.05 to 25 mmol/g, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 10 mmol/g.
  • Two or more of the functional groups represented by formula (1) may be contained in the polarity conversion compound.
  • Specific examples of the compound having the functional group represented by formula (1) are set forth below, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
    Figure imgb0003
    Figure imgb0004
    Figure imgb0005
    Figure imgb0006
    Figure imgb0007
    Figure imgb0008
    Figure imgb0009
    Figure imgb0010
    Figure imgb0011
    Figure imgb0012
    Figure imgb0013
    Figure imgb0014
    The polarity conversion compound for use in the invention may be a low molecular compound or a polymer compound and it is preferably a polymer compound. As the main chain of polymer compound, any main chain of polymer compound conventionally known may be suitably used. As for specific examples of the main chain of polymer compound, an acrylic resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin, a vinyl resin, a urethane resin, a urea resin, an amide resin, an ester resin, a carbonate resin, a novolac resin, an epoxy resin and an alkylene oxide resin are preferable an acrylic resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin, a vinyl resin, a urethane resin, a urea resin, an amide resin, an ester resin and a carbonate resin are more preferable, and an acrylic resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin, a vinyl resin and a urethane resin are particularly preferable.
  • The weight average molecular weight of the polarity conversion polymer compound is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more. By controlling the weight average molecular weight of the polarity conversion polymer compound to 5,000 or more, good printing durability and good stain resistance are obtained.
  • It is preferred that the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention further has a functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support. By the introduction of the functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support, printing durability of the image area and stain resistance in the non-image area are further improved. The functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support can be appropriately selected according to the support used. In the case of using an aluminum support which is conventionally used as the support for lithographic printing plate precursor, a functional group, for example, a phosphoric acid group or a salt group thereof, a phosphonic acid group or a salt group thereof, an ammonium group, a siloxane group, a p-dicarbonyl group or a carboxylic acid group or a salt group thereof is exemplified, although a specific functional group may be varied depending on the surface treatment of the support. Of the functional groups, a phosphoric acid salt group, a phosphonic acid salt group, an ammonium group, a siloxane group, a β-dicarbonyl group and a carboxylic acid salt group are preferable. The functional groups may be used in combination of two or more thereof. The amount of the functional group capable of interacting with the surface of support introduced into the polarity conversion compound is preferably from 0.01 to 10 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.05 to 5 mmol/g, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 3 mmol/g.
  • It is preferred that the polarity conversion compound further has a functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer. By the introduction of the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer, printing durability is further improved. The functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer can be appropriately selected according to the photosensitive layer used. In the case of using the photosensitive layer of radical polymerization type, as the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer, a radical polymerizable unsaturated bond is exemplified. In the case of using the positive type photosensitive layer using a novolac resin, as the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer, a hydrogen-acceptable functional group involved in a hydrogen bond, for example, a polyethylene oxide chain, a phenolic hydroxy group or a pyridyl group is exemplified. The functional groups may be used in combination of two or more thereof. The amount of the functional group capable of interacting with the photosensitive layer introduced into the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention is preferably from 0.01 to 10 mmol/g, more preferably from 0.05 to 5 mmol/g, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 3 mmol/g.
  • The polarity conversion compounds for use in the invention may be used individually or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
  • The amount of the polarity conversion compound for use in the invention on the support is preferably from 1 to 100 mg/m2, more preferably from 2 to 80 mg/m2, particularly preferably from 3 to 50 mg/m2. in the range described above, good printing durability and good stain resistance are obtained.
  • The preparation of the support having on its surface the polarity conversion compound can be performed in a conventional manner, for example, by a method of coating the polarity conversion compound on a support substrate or a method of immersing a support substrate in a solution containing the polarity conversion compound. Specifically, a method is used wherein the polarity conversion compound is dissolved or dispersed in an appropriate solvent, for example, toluene, xylene, benzene, hexane, heptane, cyclohexane, diethyl ether, diisopropyl ether, dimethoxyethane, anisol, tetrahydrofuran, methylene chloride, chloroform, ethylene dichloride, chlorobenzene, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetramethylurea, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, γ-butyrolactone or water, and if desired, a component, for example, a surfactant is added to prepare a coating solution or an immersing solution, and the coating solution is coated on the support or the support is immersed in the immersing solution, followed by drying. The preparation method of the coating solution or immersing solution, coating method, immersing method, drying method and the like can be appropriately determined by the person skilled in the art.
  • The support having on its surface the compound having the functional group X has a contact angle of water droplet in air of 70° or more on its surface. The measurement of the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support can be carried out according to the following method. Specifically, under atmosphere of 25°C, 1 to 3 µl of distilled water is dropped on a support to be measured and after a lapse of 60 seconds for stabilization, the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support is measured based on a conventional θ/2 method using a contact angle meter DAC-VZ produced by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd. The θ/2 method is a method for determining a contact angle based on the fact that the equation of θ = 2θ1 is formed by setting the angle formed between the line connecting the contact point A between the surface of water droplet and the surface of support and the apex B of the water droplet and the surface of support to θ1 and setting the angle formed between the tangent line of the water droplet at the contact point A and the surface of support to θ (contact angle) as shown in Fig. 3.
  • The contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support is preferably 75° or more, more preferably 80° or more.
  • The support for use in the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is not particularly restricted as long as it has the characteristic described above and it is a dimensionally stable plate-like support. The support includes, for example, paper, paper laminated with plastic (for example, polyethylene, polypropylene or polystyrene), a metal plate (for example, aluminum, zinc or copper plate), a plastic film (for example, cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose butyrate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose nitrate, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene, polystyrene, polypropylene, polycarbonate or polyvinyl acetal film) and paper or a plastic film laminated or deposited with the metal described above. Preferable examples of the support include a polyester film and an aluminum plate. Among them, the aluminum plate is preferred since it has good dimensional stability and is relatively inexpensive.
  • The aluminum plate includes a pure aluminum plate, an alloy plate comprising aluminum as a main component and containing a trace amount of hetero elements and a thin film of aluminum or aluminum alloy laminated with plastic. The hetero element contained in the aluminum alloy includes, for example, silicon, iron, manganese, copper, magnesium, chromium, zinc, bismuth, nickel and titanium, The content of the hetero element in the aluminum alloy is preferably 10% by weight or less. Although a pure aluminum plate is preferred in the invention, since completely pure aluminum is difficult to be produced in view of the refining technique, the aluminum plate may slightly contain the hetero element. The composition is not specified for the aluminum plate and those materials conventionally known and used can be appropriately utilized.
  • The thickness of the aluminum support is preferably from 0.1 to 0.6 mm, more preferably from 0.15 to 0.4 mm, still more preferably from 0.2 to 0.3 mm.
  • Prior to the use of aluminum plate, a surface treatment, for example, roughening treatment or anodizing treatment is preferably performed. The surface treatment enlarges the range of change in the contact angle according to the invention, facilitates to ensure adhesion between the photosensitive layer and the support and improve the stain resistance. In advance of the roughening treatment of the aluminum plate, a degreasing treatment, for example, with a surfactant, an organic solvent or an aqueous alkaline solution is conducted for removing rolling oil on the surface thereof, if desired.
  • The roughening treatment of the surface of the aluminum plate is conducted by various methods and includes, for example, mechanical roughening treatment, electrochemical roughening treatment (roughening treatment of electrochemically dissolving the surface) and chemical roughening treatment (roughening treatment of chemically dissolving the surface selectively).
  • As the method of the mechanical roughening treatment, a known method, for example, a ball grinding method, a brush grinding method, a blast grinding method or a buff grinding method can be used.
  • The electrochemical roughening treatment method includes, for example, a method of conducting it by passing alternating current or direct current in an electrolytic solution containing an acid, for example, hydrochloric acid or nitric acid. Also, a method of using a mixed acid described in JP-A-54-63902 can be used.
  • The aluminum plate after the roughening treatment is subjected, if desired, to an alkali etching treatment using an aqueous solution, for example, of potassium hydroxide or sodium hydroxide and further subjected to a neutralizing treatment, and then subjected to an anodizing treatment in order to enhance the abrasion resistance, if desired.
  • As the electrolyte used for the anodizing treatment of the aluminum plate, various electrolytes capable of forming porous oxide film can be used. Ordinarily, sulfuric acid, hydrochloric acid, oxalic acid, chromic acid or a mixed acid thereof is used. The concentration of the electrolyte can be appropriately determined depending on the kind of the electrolyte.
  • Since the conditions of the anodizing treatment are varied depending on the electrolyte used, they cannot be defined generally. However, it is ordinarily preferred that electrolyte concentration in the solution is from 1 to 80% by weight, liquid temperature is from 5 to 70°C, current density is from 5 to 60 A/dm2, voltage is from 1 to 100 V, and electrolysis time is from 10 seconds to 5 minutes. The amount of the anodized film formed is preferably from 1.0 to 5.0 g/m2, more preferably from 1.5 to 4.0 g/m2. In the range described above, good printing durability and preferable scratch resistance in the non-image area of lithographic printing plate can be achieved.
  • The aluminum plate subjected to the surface treatment and having the anodized film is used as it is as the support in the invention. However, in order to more improve adhesion to a layer provided thereon, hydrophilicity after the treatment, with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, resistance to stain, heat insulating property or the like, other treatment, for example, a treatment for enlarging micropores or a sealing treatment of micropores of the anodized film described in JP-A-2001-253181 and JP-A-2001-322365 , or a surface hydrophilizing treatment by immersing the support in an aqueous solution containing a hydrophilic compound, may be appropriately conducted. Needless to say, the enlarging treatment and sealing treatment are not limited to those described in the above-described patents and any conventionally known method may be employed.
  • As the sealing treatment, as well as a sealing treatment with steam, a sealing treatment with an aqueous solution containing an inorganic fluorine compound, for example, fluorozirconic acid alone or sodium fluoride, a sealing treatment with steam having added thereto lithium chloride or a sealing treatment with hot water may be employed.
  • Among them, the sealing treatment with an aqueous solution containing an inorganic fluorine compound, the sealing treatment with water vapor and a sealing treatment with hot water are preferred.
  • The hydrophilizing treatment includes an alkali metal silicate method described in U.S. Patents 2,714,066 , 3,181,461 , 3,280,734 and 3,902,734 . In the method, the support is subjected to an immersion treatment or an electrolytic treatment in an aqueous solution, for example, of sodium silicate. In addition, the hydrophilizing treatment includes, for example, a method of treating with potassium fluorozirconate described in JP-B-36-22063 and a method of treating with polyvinylphosphonic acid described in U.S. Patents 3,276,868 , 4,153,461 and 4,689,272 .
  • Further, in the case of using, for example, a polyester film as the support in the invention, it is preferred to provide an antistatic layer on one side or both sides thereof. When the antistatic layer is provided between the support and the layer containing the compound having a functional group X, it also contributes to improve the adhesion of the layer containing the compound having a functional group X to the support. As the antistatic layer, a polymer layer having fine particles of metal oxide or a matting agent dispersed therein described in JP-A-2002-79772 can be used.
  • The support preferably has a center line average roughness of 0.10 to 1.2 µm. In the range described above, good adhesion to the photosensitive layer, good printing durability and good stain resistance can be achieved.
  • The color density of the support is preferably from 0.15 to 0.65 in terms of the reflection density value. In the range described above, good image-forming property by preventing halation at the image exposure and good aptitude for plate inspection after development can be achieved.
  • The support according to the invention prepares a lithographic printing plate precursor by forming a photosensitive layer thereon. In particular, when it is used as a support for lithographic printing plate precursor of a simple processing type having a photosensitive layer capable of being developed with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10, the lithographic printing plate precursor exerting excellent printing durability and stain resistance can be provided.
  • [Lithographic printing plate precursor]
  • The lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention comprises a photosensitive layer on the support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more described above. Lithographic printing plate precursors may be classified into (1) a radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor, (2) a heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor and (3) a polarity conversion type lithographic printing plate precursor mainly depending on the characteristics of the photosensitive layer (hereinafter, also referred to as an "image-forming layer") and the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can be used as any of these types.
  • First, the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor is described below.
  • [Photosensitive layer]
  • The photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor contains a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, a binder polymer, a sensitizing dye and other components. The components constituting the photosensitive layer are described below, respectively.
  • (Polymerizable compound)
  • The polymerizable compound for use in the photosensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is an addition-polymerizable compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and it is selected from compounds having at least one, preferably two or more, terminal ethylenically unsaturated double bonds. Such compounds are widely known in the art and they can be used in the invention without any particular limitation. The compound has a chemical form, for example, a monomer, a prepolymer, specifically, a dimer, a trimer or an oligomer, or a copolymer thereof, or a mixture thereof. Examples of the monomer include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid or maleic acid) and esters or amides thereof. Preferably, esters of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound and amides of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound are used. An addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a nucleophilic substituent, for example, a hydroxy group, an amino group or a mercapto group, with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy compound, or a dehydration condensation reaction product of the unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. Moreover, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent, for example, an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol, or a substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a releasable substituent, for example, a halogen atom or a tosyloxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also preferably used. In addition, compounds in which the unsaturated carboxylic acid described above is replaced by an unsaturated phosphonic acid, styrene, vinyl ether or the like can also be used.
  • Specific examples of the monomer, which is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound with an unsaturated carboxylic acid, include acrylic acid esters, for example, ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, tetramethylene glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(acryloyloxypropyl) ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate, sorbitol hexaacrylate, tri(acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide (EO) modified triacrylate or polyester acrylate oligomer; methacrylic acid esters, for example, tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylolethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrytate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, bis[p-(3-methacryloxy-2-hydroxypropoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane or bis[p-(methacryloxyethoxy)phenyl]dimethylmetbane; itaconic acid esters, for example, ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate or sorbitol tetraitaconate; crotonic acid esters, for example, ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate or sorbitol tetracrotonate; isocrotonic acid esters, for example, ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate or sorbitol tetraisocrotonate; and maleic acid esters, for example, ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate and sorbitol tetramaleate.
  • Other examples of the ester, which can be preferably used, include aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-51-47334 and JP-A-57-196231 , esters having an aromatic skeleton described in JP-A-59-5240 , JP-A-59-5241 and JP-A-2-226149 , and esters containing an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613 .
  • The above-described ester monomers can also be used as a mixture.
  • Specific examples of the monomer, which is an amide of an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound with an unsaturated carboxylic acid, include methylene bisacrylamide, methylene bismethacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bisacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bismethacrylamide, diethylenetriamine trisacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide and xylylene bismethacrylamide. Other preferable examples of the amide monomer include amides having a cyclohexylene structure described in JP-B-54-21726 .
  • Urethane type addition-polymerizable compounds produced using an addition reaction between an isocyanate and a hydroxy group are also preferably used, and specific examples thereof include vinylurethane compounds having two or more polymerizable vinyl groups per molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer containing a hydroxy group represented by formula (A) shown below to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups per molecule, described in JP-B-48-41708 .

             CH2=C(R4)COOCH2CH(R5)OH     (A)

    wherein R4 and R5 each independently represents H or CH3.
  • Also, urethane acrylates described in JP-A-51-37193 , JP-B-2-32293 and JP-B-2-16765 , and urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860 , JP-B-56-17654 , JP-B-62-39417 and JP-B-62-39418 are preferably used. Further, a photopolymerizable composition having remarkably excellent photo-speed can be obtained by using an addition polymerizable compound having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in its molecule, described in JP-A-63-277653 , JP-A-63-260909 and JP-A-1-105238 .
  • Other examples include polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates, for example, polyester acrylates and epoxy acrylates obtained by reacting an epoxy resin with (meth)acrylic acid, described in JP-A-48-64183 , JP-B-49-43191 and JP-B-52-30490 . Specific unsaturated compounds described in JP-B-46-43946 , JP-B-1-40337 and JP-B-1-40336 , and vinylphosphonic acid type compounds described in JP-A-2-25493 can also be exemplified. In some cases, structure containing a perfluoroalkyl group described in JP-A-61-22048 can be preferably used. Moreover, photocurable monomers or oligomers described in Nippon Secchaku Kyokaishi (Journal of Japan Adhesion Society), Vol. 20, No. 7, pages 300 to 308 (1984) can also be used.
  • Details of the method of using the polymerizable compound, for example, selection of the structure, individual or combination use or an amount added, can be appropriately determined in accordance with the characteristic design of the final lithographic printing plate precursor. For instance, the polymerizable compound is selected from the following standpoints.
  • In view of the sensitivity, a structure having a large content of unsaturated group per molecule is preferred and in many cases, a difunctional or more functional compound is preferred. Also, in order to increase the strength of the image area, that is, hardened layer, a trifunctional or more functional compound is preferred. A combination use of compounds different in the functional number or in the kind of polymerizable group (for example, an acrylic acid ester, a methacrylic acid ester, a styrene compound or a vinyl ether compound) is an effective method for controlling both the sensitivity and the strength.
  • The selection and use method of the polymerizable compound are also important factors for the compatibility and dispersibility with other components (for example, a binder polymer, a polymerization initiator or a coloring agent) in the photosensitive layer. For instance, the compatibility may be improved in some cases by using the compound of low purity or using two or more kinds of the compounds in combination. Further, a specific structure may be selected for the purpose of improving an adhesion property to a support, a protective layer or the like described hereinafter.
  • The polymerizable compound is used preferably in a range from 5 to 80% by weight, more preferably in a range from 25 to 75% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer. The polymerizable compounds may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof. In the method of using the polymerizable compound, the structure, blend and amount added can be appropriately selected by taking account of the degree of polymerization inhibition due to oxygen, resolution, fogging property, change in refractive index, surface tackiness and the like. Further, depending on the case, a layer construction, for example, an undercoat layer or an overcoat layer, and a coating method, may also be considered.
  • (Polymerization initiator)
  • The polymerization initiator for use in the photosensitive layer according to the invention is a compound which generates a radical with light energy or heat energy to initiate or accelerate polymerization of a compound having a polymerizable unsaturated group. The polymerization initiator is appropriately selected to use, for example, from known polymerization initiators and compounds containing a bond having small bond dissociation energy.
  • The polymerization initiators include, for example, organic halogen compounds, carbonyl compounds, organic peroxides, azo compounds, azido compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, organic boron compounds, disulfone compounds, oxime ester compounds and onium salt compounds.
  • The organic halogen compounds described above specifically include, for example, compounds described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), U.S. Patent 3,905,815 , JP-B-46-4605 , JP-A-48-36281 , JP-A-53-133428 , JP-A-55-32070 , JP-A-60-239736 , JP-A-61-169835 , JP-A-61-169837 , JP-A-62-58241 , JP-A-62-212401 , JP-A-63-70243 , JP-A-63-298339 and M. P. Hutt, Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry. 1, No. 3 (1970). Among them, oxazole compounds and s-triazine compounds each substituted with a trihalomethyl group are preferable.
  • More preferably, s-triazine derivatives in which at least one of mono-, di- or tri-halogen substituted methyl group is connected to the s-triazine ring and oxadiazole derivatives in which at least one of mono-, di- or tri-halogen substituted methyl group is connected to the oxadiazole ring are exemplified. Specific examples thereof include 2,4,6-tris(monochloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(dichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(trichloromethyl)-s-triaxine, 2-methyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-n-propyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(α,α,β-trichloroethyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(3,4-epoxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-[1-(p-methoxyphenyl)-2,4-butadienyl]-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-styryl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-methoxystyryl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-isopropyloxystyryl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-tolyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(4-methoxynaphthyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-phenylthio-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-benzylthio-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(dibromomethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(tribromomethyl)-s-triazine, 2-methyl-4,6-bis(tribromomethyl)-s-triazine, 2-methoxy-4,6-bis(tribromomethyl)-s-triazine and compounds shown below.
    Figure imgb0015
    Figure imgb0016
    Figure imgb0017
    Figure imgb0018
    Figure imgb0019
    Figure imgb0020
    Figure imgb0021
    Figure imgb0022
    Figure imgb0023
    Figure imgb0024
    Figure imgb0025
    Figure imgb0026
    Figure imgb0027
    Figure imgb0028
    Figure imgb0029
    Figure imgb0030
    Figure imgb0031
    Figure imgb0032
  • The carbonyl compounds described above include, for example, benzophenone derivatives, e.g., benzophenone, Michler's ketone, 2-methylbenzophenone, 3-methylbenzophenone, 4-methylbenzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4-bromobenzophenone or 2-carboxybenzophenone, acetophenone derivatives, e.g., 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenylketone, α-hydroxy-2-methylphenylpropane, 1-hydroxy-1-methylethyl-(p-isopropylphenyl)kelone, 1-hydroxy-1-(p-dodecylphenyl)ketone, 2-methyl-(4'-(methylthio)phenyl)-2-morpholino-1-propane or 1,1,1,-trichloromethyl-(p-butylphenyl)ketone, thioxantone derivatives, e.g., thioxantone, 2-ethylthioxantone, 2-isopropylthioxantone, 2-chlorothioxantone, 2,4-dimetylthioxantone, 2,4-dietylthioxantone or 2,4-diisopropylthioxantone, and benzoic acid ester derivatives, e.g., ethyl p-dimethylaminobenzoate or ethyl p-diethylaminobenzoate.
  • The azo compounds described above include, for example, azo compounds described in JP-A-8-108621 .
  • The organic peroxides described above include, for example, trimethylcyclohexanone peroxide, acetylacetone peroxide, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, 2,2-bis(tert-butylperoxy)butane, tert-butylhydroperoxide, cumene hydroperoxide, diisopropylbenzene hydroperoxide, 2,5-dimethylhexane-2,5-dihydroperoxide, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide, tert-butylcumyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, 2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane, 2,5-oxanoyl peroxide, peroxy succinic acid, benzoyl peroxide, 2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide, diisopropylperoxy dicarbonate, di-2-ethylhexylperoxy dicarbonate, di-2-ethoxyethylperoxy dicarbonate, dimethoxyisopropylperoxy dicarbonate, di(3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl)peroxy dicarbonate, tert-butylperoxy acetate, tert-butylperoxy pivalate, tert-butylperoxy neodecanoate, tert-butylperoxy octanoate, tert-butylperoxy laurate, tersyl carbonate, 3,3',4,4'-tetra(tert-butylperoxycarbonyl)benzophenone, 3,3',4,4'-tetra(tert-hexylperoxycarbonyl)benzophenone, 3,3',4,4'-tetra(p-isopropylcumylperoxycarbonyl)benzophenone, carbonyl di(tert-butylperoxydihydrogen diphthalate) and carbonyl di(tert-hexylperoxydihydrogen diphthalate).
  • The metallocene compounds described above include, for example, various titanocene compounds described in JP-A-59-152396 , TP- A-61-151197 , JP-A-63-41484 , JP-A-2-249 , JP-A-2-4705 and JP-A-5-83588 , for example, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bisphenyl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,6-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,4-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,4,6-triafluoropben-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,6-difluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopeatadienyl-Ti-bis-2,4,6-triafluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopentadienyl-Ti-bis-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1-yl, or bis(cyclopentadienyl)-bis(2,6-difluoro-3-(pyr-1-yl)phenyl) titanium and iron-arene complexes described in JP-A-1-304453 and JP-A-1-152109 .
  • The hexaarylbiimidazole compounds described above include, for example, various compounds described in JP-B-6-29285 and U.S. Patents 3,479,185 , 4,311,783 and 4,622,286 , specifically, for example, 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-bromophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,p-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetra(m-methoxyphenyl)biimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,o'-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-nitrophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-methylphenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole and 2,2'-bis(o-trifluoromethylphenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole.
  • The organic boron compounds described above include, for example, organic boric acid salts described in JP-A-62-143044 , JP-A-62-150242 , JP-A-9-188685 , JP-A-9-188686 , JP-A-9-188710 , JP-A-2000-131837 , JP-A-2002-107916 , Japanese Patent 2764769 , JP-A-2002-116539 and Martin Kunz, Rad Tech '98, Proceeding, April 19-22 (1998), Chicago, organic boron sulfonium complexes or organic boron oxosulfonium complexes described in JP-A-6-157623 , JP-A-6-175564 and JP-A-6-175561 , organic boron iodonium complexes described in JP-A-6-175554 and JP-A-6-175553 , organic boron phosphonium complexes described in JP-A-9-188710 , and organic boron transition metal coordination complexes described in JP-A-6-348011 , JP-A-7-128785 , JP-A-7-140589 , JP-A-7-306527 and JP-A-7-292014 .
  • The disulfone compounds described above include, for example, compounds described in JP-A-61-166544 and JP-A-2002-328465 .
  • The oxime ester compounds described above include, for example, compounds described in J. C. S. Perkin II, 1653-1660 (1979), J. C. S. Perkin II, 156-162 (1979), Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology, 202-232 (1995) and JP-A-2000-66385 , and compounds described in JP-A-2000-80068 . Specific examples thereof include compounds represented by the following structural formulae:
    Figure imgb0033
    Figure imgb0034
    Figure imgb0035
    Figure imgb0036
    Figure imgb0037
  • The onium salt compounds described above include onium salts, for example, diazonium salts described in S. I. Schlesinger, Photogr. Sci, Eng., 18, 387 (1974) and T. S. Bal et al., Polymer, 21, 423 (1980), ammonium salts described in U.S. Patent 4,069,055 and JP-A-4-365049 , phosphonium salts described in U.S. Patents 4,069,055 and 4,069,056 , iodonium salts described in European Patent 104,143 , U.S. Patents 339,049 and 410,201 , JP-A-2-150848 and JP-A-2-296514 , sulfonium salts described in European Patents 370,693 , 390,214 , 233,567 , 297,443 and 297,442 , U.S. Patents 4,933,377 , 161,811 , 410,201 , 339,049 , 4,760,013 , 4,734,444 and 2,833,827 and German Patents 2,904,626 , 3,604,580 and 3,604,581 , selenonium salts described in J.V. Crivello et al., Macromolecules, 10 (6), 1307 (1977) and J.V. Crivello et al., J. Polymer Sei., Polymer Chem. Ed., 17, 1047 (1979), and arsonium salts described in C.S. Wen et al., Teh, Proc. Conf. Rad. Curing ASIA, p. 478, Tokyo, Oct. (1988).
  • In the invention, the onium salt functions not as an acid generator, but as an ionic radical polymerization initiator.
  • The onium salts preferably used in the invention include onium salts represented by the following formulae (RI-I) to (RI-III):
    Figure imgb0038
    Figure imgb0039
    Figure imgb0040
  • In formula (RI-I), Ar11 represents an aryl group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have 1 to 6 substituents. Preferable examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an alkylamino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a dialkylimino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkylamido group or arylamido having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a sulfonyl group, an thioalkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms and an thioaryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms. Z11 - represents a monovalent anion. Specific examples of the monovalent anion include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion, a thosulfonate ion and a sulfate ion. Among them, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion and a sulfinate ion are preferred in view of stability.
  • In the formula (RI-II), Ar21 and Ar22 each independently represents an aryl group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have 1 to 6 substituents. Preferable examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an alkylamino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a dialkylimino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkylamido group or arylamido group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a sulfonyl group, an thioalkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms and an thioaryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms. Z21 - represents a monovalent anion. Specific examples of the monovalent anion include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion, a thosulfonate ion, a sulfate ion and a carboxylate ion. Among them, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion and a carboxylate ion are preferred in view of stability and reactivity.
  • In the formula (RI-III), R31, R32 and R33 each independently represents an aryl group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have 1 to 6 substituents, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group or an alkynyl group. Among them, the aryl group is preferred in view of reactivity and stability. Preferable examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an aryloxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom, an alkylamino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a dialkylimino group having 12 or less carbon atoms, an alkylamido group or arylamido group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carbonyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, a sulfonyl group, an thioalkyl group having 12 or less carbon atoms and an thioaryl group having 12 or less carbon atoms. Z31 - represents a monovalent anion. Specific examples of the monovalent anion include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion, a thosulfonate ion, a sulfate ion and a carboxylate ion. Among them, a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a sulfonate ion, a sulfinate ion and a carboxylate ion are preferred in view of stability and reactivity. Carboxylate ions described in JP-A-2001-343742 are more preferable, and carboxylate ions described in JP-A-2002-148790 are particularly preferable.
  • Specific examples of the onium salt are set forth below, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
    Figure imgb0041
    Figure imgb0042


             ClO4 -     (N-4)

             PF8 -     (N-5)

    Figure imgb0043


             BE4 -     (N-7)

    Figure imgb0044


             ClO4 -     (N-9)

    Figure imgb0045
    Figure imgb0046


             PFe -     (N-12)

    Figure imgb0047


             ClO4 -     (N-14)

    Figure imgb0048


             PF6 -     (N-16)

    Figure imgb0049
    Figure imgb0050


             PF6 -     (I-2)

    Figure imgb0051
    Figure imgb0052
    Figure imgb0053
    Figure imgb0054
    Figure imgb0055


             ClO4 -     (I-14)

             PF6 -     (I-15)

    Figure imgb0056


             CF3COO-     (I-17)

             CF3SO3 -     (I-18)

    Figure imgb0057
    Figure imgb0058
    Figure imgb0059
    Figure imgb0060
    Figure imgb0061


             ClO4 -     (S-3)

    Figure imgb0062
    Figure imgb0063


             CF3SO3 -     (S-6)

    Figure imgb0064
    Figure imgb0065
    Figure imgb0066
    Figure imgb0067
    Figure imgb0068
    Figure imgb0069
    Figure imgb0070
    Figure imgb0071
  • The polymerization initiator is not limited to those described above. In particular, from the standpoint of reactivity and stability, the triazine type initiators, organic halogen compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime ester compounds, diazonium salts, iodonium salts and sulfonium salts are more preferable.
  • The polymerization initiators may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof. Also, the polymerization initiator may be added together with other components in one layer or may be added to a different layer separately provided. The polymerization initiator can be added preferably in an amount from 0.1 to 50% by weight, more preferably from 0.5 to 30% by weight, particularly preferably from 0.8 to 20% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Binder polymer)
  • The binder polymer which can be used in the photosensitive layer according to the invention is preferably a water-insoluble polymer. Further, the binder polymer which can be used in the invention preferably does not substantially contain an acid group, for example, a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group or a phosphoric acid group. An acid value (acid content per g of polymer, indicated by the chemical equivalent number) of the binder polymer is preferably 0.3 meq/g or less, more preferably 0.1 meq/g or less.
  • Specifically, the binder polymer which can be used in the invention is preferably insoluble in water and an aqueous solution having a pH of 10 or more. The solubility of the hydrophobic binder polymer in water or an aqueous solution having a pH of 10 or more is preferably 0.5% by weight or less, more preferably 0.1% by weight or less. By using such a binder polymer, film strength, water resistance and ink-receptive property of the photosensitive layer are increased and improvements in printing durability can be achieved.
  • As for the binder polymer, conventionally known binder polymers preferably having the characteristics in the above-described range can be used without limitation as long as the performances of the lithographic printing plate of the invention are not impaired, and a linear organic polymer having film-forming property is preferred.
  • Preferable examples of such a binder polymer include a polymer selected from an acrylic resin, a polyvinyl acetal resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, an epoxy resin, a methacrylic resin, a styrene resin and a polyester resin. Among them, an acrylic resin is preferred, and a (meth)acrylic acid ester copolymer is more preferred. More specifically, a copolymer of a (meth)acrylic acid alkyl or aralkyl ester with a (meth)acrylic acid ester containing a -CH2CH2O- or -CH2CH2NH- unit in R of the ester residue (-COOR) of the (meth)acrylic acid ester is particularly preferred. The alkyl group in the (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferably an alkyl group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group. Preferable examples of the (meth)acrylic acid aralkyl ester include benzyl (meth)acrylate.
  • The binder polymer can be imparted with a crosslinking property in order to increase the film strength of the image area.
  • In order to impart the crosslinking property to the binder polymer, a crosslinkable functional group is introduced into a main chain or side chain of the polymer. The crosslinkable functional group may be introduced by copolymerization or a polymer reaction.
  • The term "crosslinkable group" as used herein means a group capable of crosslinking the polymer binder in the process of a radical polymerization reaction which is caused in the photosensitive layer, when the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed to light. The crosslinkable group is not particularly restricted as long as it has such a function and includes, for example, an ethylenically unsaturated bond group, an amino group or an epoxy group as a functional group capable of conducting an addition polymerization reaction. Also, a functional group capable of forming a radical upon irradiation with light may be used and such a crosslinkable group includes, for example, a thiol group, a halogen atom and an onium salt structure.
  • Among them, the ethylenically unsaturated bond group is preferable, and functional groups represented by formulae (1) to (3) shown below are particularly preferable.
    Figure imgb0072
  • In formula (1), R1 to R3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R1 preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. Among them, a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable because of high radical reactivity. R2 and R3 each independently preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent. Among them, a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent is preferable because of high radical reactivity.
  • X represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or -N(R12)-, and R12 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group represented by R12 includes, for example, an alkyl group which may have a substituent. A hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group or an isopropyl group is preferable for R12 because of high radical reactivity.
  • Examples of the substituent introduced include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a halogen atom, an amino group, an alkylamino group, an arylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an amido group, an alkylsulfonyl group and an arylsulfonyl group.
    Figure imgb0073
  • In formula (2), R4 to R8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R4 to R8 each independently preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amino group, a dialkylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent. Among them, a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent is preferable.
  • Examples of the substituent introduced include those described in Formula (1).
  • Y represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or -N(R12)-, and R12 has the same meaning as R12 defined in Formula (1). Preferable examples for R12 are also same as those described in Formula (1).
    Figure imgb0074
  • In formula (3), R9 to R11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group includes, for example, an alkyl group which may have a substituent. A hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable for R9 because of high radical reactivity. R10 and R11 each independently preferably includes, for example, a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an amino group, a dialkylamino group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a sulfo group, a nitro group, a cyano group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, an aryloxy group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent. Among them, a hydrogen atom, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkyl group which may have a substituent or an aryl group which may have a substituent is preferable because of high radical reactivity.
  • Examples of the substituent introduced include those described in Formula (1).
  • Z represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, -N(R13)- or a phenylene group which may have a substituent. R13 includes an alkyl group which may have a substituent or the like. Among them, a methyl group, an ethyl group or an isopropyl group is preferable for R13 because of high radical reactivity.
  • Among the polymers, a (meth)acrylic acid copolymer and a polyurethane each having a crosslinkable functional group in the side chain thereof are more preferable.
  • In the binder polymer having a crosslinking property, for example, a free radical (a polymerization initiating radical or a propagating radical in the process of polymerization of the polymerizable compound) is added to the crosslinkable functional group to cause addition-polymerization between polymers directly or through a polymerization chain of the polymerizable compound, as a result, crosslinking is formed between polymer molecules to effect curing. Alternatively, an atom (for example, a hydrogen atom on the carbon atom adjacent to the functional crosslinkable group) in the polymer is withdrawn by a free radical to produce a polymer radical and the polymer radicals are combined with each other to form crosslinking between polymer molecules to effect curing.
  • The content of the crosslinkable functional group (content of radical-polymerizable unsaturated double bond determined by iodine titration) in the binder polymer is preferably from 0.1 to 10.0 mmol, more preferably from 1.0 to 7.0 mmol, most preferably from 2.0 to 5.5 mmol, per g of the binder polymer.
  • In view of improvement in the developing property with an aqueous solution, the binder polymer is preferably hydrophilic. On the other hand, in view of increasing the printing durability, it is important that the binder polymer has good compatibility with the polymerizable compound contained in the photosensitive layer, that is, the binder polymer is preferably oleophilic. From these standpoints, it is also effective in the invention to copolymerize a hydrophilic group-containing component and an oleophilic group-containing component in the binder polymer in order to improve the developing property and printing durability. Preferable examples of the hydrophilic group in the hydrophilic group-containing component include a hydroxy group, a carboxylate group, a hydroxyethyl group, an ethyleneoxy group, a hydroxypropyl group, a polyoxyethyl group, a polyoxypropyl group, an amino group, an aminoethyl group, an aminopropyl group, an ammonium group, an amido group, a carboxymethyl group, a sulfonate group and a phosphonate group.
  • The binder polymer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 5,000 or more, more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000, and a number average molecular weight of 1,000 or more, more preferably from 2,000 to 250,000. The polydispersity (weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight) is preferably from 1.1 to 10.
  • The binder polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer and the like, and it is preferably a random polymer.
  • The binder polymers may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • The content of the binder polymer is ordinarily from 5 to 90% by weight, preferably from 10 to 70% by weight, more preferably from 10 to 60% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer. In the range described above, preferable strength of the image area and good image-forming property are obtained.
  • (Sensitizing dye)
  • The photosensitive layer preferably contains a sensitizing dye corresponding to a wavelength of an exposure light source. The sensitizing dye is appropriately selected depending on the use or the like and is not particularly restricted. For instance, a sensitizing dye absorbing light of 350 to 450 nm and an infrared absorbing agent are exemplified.
  • <Sensitizing dye absorbing light of 350 to 450 nm>
  • The sensitizing dye absorbing light of 350 to 450 nm for use in the invention preferably has an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 350 to 450 nm. Such sensitizing dyes include, for example, merocyanine dyes represented by formula (I) shown below, benzopyranes or coumarins represented by formula (II) shown below, aromatic ketones represented by formula (III) shown below and anthracenes represented by formula (IV) shown below.
    Figure imgb0075
  • In formula (I), A represents a sulfur atom or NR6, R6 represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group, Y represents a non-metallic atomic group necessary for forming a basic nucleus of the dye together with adjacent A and the adjacent carbon atom, and X1 and X2 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group or X1 and X2 may be combined with each other to form an acidic nucleus of the dye.
    Figure imgb0076
  • In formula (II), =Z represents an oxo group, a thioxo group, an imino group or an alkylydene group represented by the partial structural formula (I') described above, X1 and X2 have the same meanings as defined in formula (I) respectively, and R7 to R12 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group.
    Figure imgb0077
  • In formula (III), Ar3 represents an aromatic group which may have a substituent or a heteroaromatic group which may have a substituent, and R13 represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group. R13 preferably represents an aromatic group or a heteroaromatic group. Ar3 and R13 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
    Figure imgb0078
  • In formula (IV), X3, X4 and R14 to R21 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group. Preferably, X3 and X4 each independently represents an electron-donating group having a negative Hammett substituent constant.
  • In formulae (I) to (IV), preferable examples of the monovalent non-metallic atomic group represented by any one of X1 to X4 and R6 to R21 include a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, an undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an eucosyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl goup, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, an isohexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a 2-methylhexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a 2-norbomyl group, a chloromethyl group, a bromomethyl group, a 2-chloroethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a methoxymethyl group, a methoxyethoxyethyl goup, an allyloxymethyl group, a phenoxymethyl group, a methylthiomethyl group, a tolylthiomethyl group, an ethylaminoethyl group, a diethylaminopropyl group, a morpholinopropyl group, an acetyloxymethyl group, a benzoyloxymethyl group, an N-cyclohexylearbamoyloxyethyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoyloxyethyl group, an acetylaminoethyl group, an N-methylbenzoylaminopropyl group, a 2-oxoethyl group, a 2-oxopropyl group, a carboxypropyl group, a methoxycarbonylethyl group, an allyloxycarbonylbutyl group, a chlorophenoxycarbonylmethyl group, a carbamoylmethyl group, an N-methylcarbamoylethyl group, an N,N-dipropylcarbamoylmethyl group, an N-(methoxyphenyl)carbamoylethyl group, an N-methyl-N-(sulfophenyl)carbamoylmethyl group, a sulfobutyl group, a sulfonatobutyl group, a sulfamoylbutyl group, an N-ethylsulfamoylmethyl group, an N,N-dipropylsulfamoylpropyl group, an N-tolylsulfamoylpropyl group, an N-methyl-N-(phosphonophenyl)sulfamoyloctyl group, a phosphonobutyl group, a phosphonatohexyl group, a diethylphosphonobutyl group, a diphenylphosphonopropyl group, a methylphosphonobutyl group, a methylphosphonatobutyl group, a tolylphosphonohexyl group, a tolylphosphonatohexyl group, a phosphonooxypropyl group, a phosphonatooxybutyl group, a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, an α-methylbenzyl group, a 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl group, a p-methylbenzyl group, a cinnamyl group, an allyl group, a 1-propenylmethyl group, a 2-butenyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, a 2-methylpropenylmethyl group, a 2-propynyl group, a 2-butynyl group or a 3-butynyl group),
    an aryl group (for example, a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, an ethoxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, an acetoxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a phenylthiophenyl group, a methylaminophenyl group, a dimethylaminophenyl group, an acetylaminophenyl group, a carboxyphenyl group, a methoxycarbonylphenyl group, an ethoxycarbonylphenyl group, a phenoxycarbonylphenyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoylphenyl group, a nitrophenyl group, a cyanophenyl group, a sulfophenyl group, a sulfonatophenyl group, a phosphonophenyl group or a phosphonatophenyl group), a heteroaryl group (for example, a group derived from a heteroaryl ring, for example, thiophene, thiathrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxazine, pyrrole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindolizine, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, phthalazine, naphthylidine, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthrine, acridine, perimidine, phenanthroline, phenarsazine or furazane), an alkenyl group (for example, a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 1-butenyl group, a cinnamyl group or a 2-chloro-1-ethenyl group), an alkynyl group (for example, an ethynyl group, a 1-propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group or a trimethylsilylethynyl group), a halogen atom (for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I), a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group,
    a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkyldithio group, an aryldithio group, an amino group, an N-alkylamino group, an N,N-dialkylamino group, an N-arylamino group, an N,N-diarylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyloxy group, an N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, an N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, an N,N-dialkylcarbamoyloxy group, an N,N-diarylcarbamoyloxy group, an N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, an alkylsulfoxy group, an arylsulfoxy group, an acylthio group, an acylamino group, an N-alkylacylamino group, an N-arylacylamino group, a ureido group, an N'-alkylureido group, an N',N'-dialkylureido group, an N'-arylureido group, an N',N'-diarylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N'-arylureido group, an N-alkylureido group, an N-arylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N-alkylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N-arylureido group, an N',N'-dialkyl-N-alkylureido group, an N',N'-dialkyl-N-arylureido group, an N'-aryl-N-alkylureido group, an N'-aryl-N-arylureido group, an N',N'-diaryl-N-alkylureido group, an N',N'-diaryl-N-arylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-alkylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-arylureido group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-aryloxycarbonylamino group, an N-aryl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino group, an N-aryl-N-aryloxycarbonylamino group, a formyl group, an acyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an N-alkylcarbamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl group, an N-arylcarbamoyl group, an N,N-diarylcarbamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyl group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a sulfo group (-SO3H) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as a "sulfonato group"), an alkoxysulfonyl group, an aryloxysulfonyl group, a sulfinamoyl group,
    an N-alkylsulfinamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylsulfinamoyl group, an N-arylsulfinamoyl group, an N,N-diarylsulfinamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylsulfinamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an N-alkylsulfamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylsulfamoyl group, an N-arylsulfamoyl group, an N,N-diarylsulfamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylsulfamoyl group, a phosphono group (-PO3H2) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as a "phosphonato group"), a dialkylphosphono group (-PO3(alkyl)2), a diarylphosphono group (-PO3(aryl)2), an alkylarylphosphono group (-PO3(alkyl)(aryl)), a monoalkylphosphono group (-PP3H(alkyl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "alkylphosphonato group"), a monoarylphosphono group (-PO3H(aryl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "arylphosphonato goup"), a phosphonooxy group (-OPO3H2) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as a "phosphonatooxy group"), a dialkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3(alkyl)2), a diarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3(aryl)2), an alkylarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3(alkyl)(aryl)), a monoalkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3H(alkyl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "alkylphosphonatooxy group"), a monoarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3H(aryl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "arylphosphonatooxy group"), a cyano group and a nitro group. Among the above-described groups, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group and an acyl group are particularly preferred.
  • The basic nucleus of the dye formed by Y together with the adjacent A and the adjacent carbon atom in formula (I) includes, for example, a 5-membered, 6-membered or 7-membered, nitrogen-containing or sulfur-containing heterocyclic ring, and is preferably a 5-membered or 6-membered heterocyclic ring.
  • As the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring, those which are known to constitute basic nuclei in merocyanine dyes described in L.G. Brooker et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 73, pp. 5326 to 5358 (1951) and references cited therein can be preferably used. Specific examples thereof include thiazoles (for example, thiazole, 4-methylthiazole, 4-phenylthiazole, 5-methylthiazole, 5-phenylthiazole, 4,5-dimethylthiazole, 4,5-diphenylthiazole, 4,5-di(p-methoxyphenyl)thiazole or 4-(2-thienyl)thiazole); benxothiazoles (for example, benzothiazole, 4-chlorobenzothiazole, 5-chlorobenzothiazole, 6-chlorobenzothiazole, 7-chlorobenzothiazole, 4-methylbenzothiazole, 5-methylbenzothiazole, 6-methylbenzothiazole, 5-bromobenzothiazole, 4-phenylbenzothiazole, 5-phenylbenzothiazole, 4-methoxybenzothiazole, 5-methoxybenzothiazole, 6-methoxybenzothiazole, 5-iodobenzothiazole, 6-iodobenzothiazole, 4-ethoxybenzothiazole, 5-ethoxybenzothiazole, tetrahydrobenzothiazole, 5,6-dimethoxybenzothiazole, 5,6-dioxymethylenebenzothiazole, 5-hydroxybenzothiazole, 6-hydroxybeazothiazole, 6-dimethylaminobenzothiazole or 5-ethoxycarbonylbenzothiazole); naphthothiazoles (for example, naphtho[1,2]thiazole, naphtho[2,1]thiazole, 5-methoxynaphtho[2,1]thiazole, 5-ethoxynaphtho[2,1]thiazole, 8-methoxynaphtho[1,2]thiazole or 7-methoxynaphtho[1,2]thiazole); thianaphtheno-7',6',4,5-thiazoles (for example, 4'-methoxythianaphtheno-7',6',4,5-thiazole); oxazoles (for example, 4-methyloxazole, 5-methyloxazole, 4-phenyloxazole, 4,5-diphenyloxazole, 4-ethyloxazole, 4,5-dimethyloxazole or 5-phenyloxazole); benzoxazoles (for example, benzoxazole, 5-chlorobenzoxazole, 5-methylbenzoxazole, 5-phenylbenzoxazole, 6-methylbenzoxazole, 5,6-dimethylbcnzoxazole, 4,6-dimethylbenzoxazole, 6-methoxybenzoxazole, 5-methoxybenzoxazole, 4-ethoxybenzoxazole, 5-chlorobenzoxazole, 6-methoxybenzoxazole, 5-hydroxybenzoxazole or 6-hydroxybenzoxazole); naphthoxazoles (for example, naphth[1,2]oxazole or naphth[2,1]oxazole); selenazoles (for example, 4-methylselenazole or 4-phenylselenazole); benzoselenazoles (for example, benzoselenazole, 5-chlorobenzoselenazole, 5-methoxybenzoselenazole, 5-hydroxybenzoselenazole or tetrahydrobenzoselenazole); naphthoselenazoles (for example, naphtho[1,2]selenazole or naphtho[2,l]selenazole); thiazolines (for example, thiazoline or 4-methylthiazoline); quinolines (for example, quinoline, 3-methylquinoline, 5-methylquinoline, 7-methylquinoline, 8-methylquinoline, 6-chloroquinoline, 8-chloroquinoline, 6-methoxyquinoline, 6-ethoxyquinoline, 6-hydroxyquinoline or 8-hydroxyquinoline); isoquinolines (for example, isoquinoline or 3,4-dihydroisoquinoline); benzimidazoles (for example, 1,3-diethylbenzimidazole or 1-ethyl-3-phenylbenzimidazole); 3,3-dialkylindolenines (for example, 3,3-dimethylindolenine, 3,3,5-trimethylindolenine or 3,3,7-trimethylindolenine); and pyridines (for example, pyridine or 5-methylpyridine),
  • Examples of the sulfur-containing heterocyclic ring include dithiol partial structures in dyes described in JP-A-3-296759 .
  • Specific examples thereof include benzodithiols (for example, benzodithiol, 5-tert-butylbenzodithiol or 5-methylbenzodithiol); naphthodithiols (for example, naphtho[1,2]dithiol or naphtho[2,1]dithiol); and dithiols (for example, 4,5-dimethyldithiol, 4-phenyldithiol, 4-methoxycarbonyldithiol, 4,5-dimethoxycarbonyldithiol, 4,5-ditrifluoromethyldithiol, 4,5-dicyanodithiol, 4-methoxycarbonylmethyldithiol or 4-carboxymethyldithiol).
  • In the description with respect to the hetexocyclic ring above, for convenience and by convention, the names of heterocyclic mother skeletons are used. In the case of constituting the basic nucleus partial structure in the sensitizing dye, the heterocyclic ring is introduced in the form of a substituent of alkylydene type where a degree of unsaturation is decreased one step. For example, a benzothiazole skeleton is introduced as a 3-substituted-2(3H)-benzothiazolylidene group.
  • Of the compounds having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 350 to 450 nm, dyes represented by formula (V) shown below are more preferable in view of high sensitivity.
    Figure imgb0079
  • In formula (V), A represents an aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, X represents an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or =N(R3), and R1, R2 and R3 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group, or A and R1 or R2 and R3 may be combined with each other to form an aliphatic or aromatic ring.
  • The formula (V) will be described in more detail below. R1, R2 and R3 each independently represents a monovalent non-metallic atomic group, preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group, a hydroxy group or a halogen atom.
  • Preferable examples of R1, R2 and R3 will be specifically described below. Preferable examples of the alkyl group include a straight chain, branched or cyclic alkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Specific examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a nonyl group, a decyl group, an undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a tridecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an eucosyl group, an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, an isohexyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a 2-methylhexyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cyclopentyl group and a 2-norbornyl group. Among them, a straight chain alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms and a cyclic alkyl group having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms are more preferable.
  • As the substituent for the substituted alkyl group, a monovalent non-metallic atomic group exclusive of a hydrogen atom is used. Preferable examples thereof include a halogen atom (for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I), a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkyldithio group, an aryldithio group, an amino group, an N-alkylamino group, an N,N-dialkylamino group, an N-arylamino group, an N,N-diarylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-arylamino group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyloxy group, an N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, an N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, an N,N-dialkylcarbamoyloxy group, an N,N-diarylcarbamoyloxy group, an N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, an alkylsulfoxy group, an arylsulfoxy group, an acylthio group, an arylamino group, an N-alkylacylamino group, an N-arylacylamino group, a ureido group, an N'-alkylureido group, an N',N'-dialkylureido group, an N'-arylureido group, an N',N'-diarylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N'-arylureido group, an N-alkylureido group, an N-arylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N-allcylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N-arylureido group, an N',N'-dialkyl-N-alkylureido group, an N',N'-dialkyl-N-arylureido group, an N'-aryl-N-alkylureido group, an N'-aryl-N-arylureido group, an N',N'-diaryl-N-alkylureido group, an N',N'-diaryl-N-arylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-alkylureido group, an N'-alkyl-N'-aryl-N-arylureido group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino group, an N-alkyl-N-aryloxycarbonylamino group, an N-aryl-N-alkoxycarbonylamino group, an N-aryl-N-aryloxycarbonylamino group, an acyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group,
    an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an N-alkylcarbamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl group, an N-arylcarbamoyl group, an N,N-diarylcarbamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyl, group, an alkylsulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl goup, an alkylsulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a sulfo group (-SO3H) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as a "sulfonato group"), an alkoxysulfonyl group, an aryloxysulfonyl group, a sulfinamoyl group, an N-alkylsulfmamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylsulfinamoyl group, an N-arylsulfinamoyl group, an N,N-diarylsulfinamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylsulfinamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an N-alkylsulfamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylsulfamoyl group, an N-arylsulfamoyl group, an N,N-diarylsulfamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylsulfamoyl group, a phosphono group (-PO3H2) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as a "phosphonato group"), a dialkylphosphono group (-PO3(alkyl)2), a diarylphosphono group (-PO3(aryl)2), an alkylarylphosphono group (-PO3(alkyl)(aryl)), a monoalkylphosphono group (-PO3H(alkyl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "alkylphosphonato group"), a monoarylphosphono group (-PO3H(aryl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "arylphosphonato group"), a phosphonooxy group (-OPO3H2) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as a "phosphonatooxy group"), a dialkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3(alkyl)2), a diarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3(aryl)2), an alkylarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3(alkyl)(aryl)), a monoalkylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3H(alkyl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "alkylphosphonatooxy group"), a monoarylphosphonooxy group (-OPO3H(aryl)) and its conjugated base group (hereinafter referred to as an "arylphosphonatooxy group"), a cyano group, a nitro group, an aryl group, a heteroaryl group, an alkenyl group and an alkynyl group.
  • In the substituents, specific examples of the alkyl group include those described for the alkyl group above. Specific examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a naphthyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, an ethoxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, an acetoxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a phenylthiophenyl group, a methylaminophenyl group, a dimethylaminophenyl group, an acetylaminophenyl group, a carboxyphenyl group, a methoxycarbonylphenyl group, an ethoxycarbonylphenyl group, a phenoxycarbonylphenyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoylphenyl group, a nitrophenyl group, a cyanophenyl group, a sulfophenyl group, a sulfonatophenyl group, a phosphonophenyl group and a phosphonatophenyl group.
  • Examples of the heteroaryl group include a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic cyclic group containing at least one of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom. Examples of especially preferable heteroaryl group include a group derived from a heteroaryl ring, for example, thiophene, thiathrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxazine, pyrrole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindolizine, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, phthalazine, naphthylidine, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthrene, acridine, perimidine, phenanthroline, phenarsazine or furazane. These groups may be benzo-fused or may have a substituent.
  • Examples of the alkenyl group include a vinyl group, a 1-propenyl group, a 1-butenyl group, a cinnamyl group and a 2-chloro-1-ethenyl group. Examples of the alkynyl group include an ethynyl group, a 1-propynyl group, a 1-butynyl group and a trimethylsilylethynyl group. Examples of G1 in the acyl group (G1CO-) include a hydrogen atom, the above-described alkyl group and aryl group. Of the substituents, a halogen atom (for example, -F, -Br, -Cl or -I), an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an N-alkylamino group, an N,N-dialkylamino group, an acyloxy group, an N-alkylcarbamoyloxy group, an N-arylcarbamoyloxy group, an acylamino group, a formyl group, an acyl group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an N-alkylcarbaanoyl group, an N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl group, an N-arylcarbamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylcarbamoyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonato group, a sulfamoyl group, an N-alkylsulfamoyl group, an N,N-dialkylsulfamoyl group, an N-arylsulfamoyl group, an N-alkyl-N-arylsulfamoyl group, a phosphono group, a phosphonato group, a dialkylphosphono group, a diarylphosphono group, a monoalkylphosphono group, an alkylphosphonato group, a monoarylphosphono group, an arylphosphonato group, a phosphonooxy group, a phosphonatooxy group, an aryl group and an alkenyl group are more preferable.
  • On the other hand, as an alkylene group in the substituted alkyl group, a divalent organic residue resulting from elimination of any one of hydrogen atoms on the above-described alkyl group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms can be enumerated. Examples of preferable alkylene group include a straight chain alkylene group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkylene group having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms and a cyclic alkylene group having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the preferable substituted alkyl group represented by any one of R1, R2 and R3, which is obtained by combining the above-described substituent with the alkylene group, include a chloromethyl group, a bromomethyl group, a 2-chloroethyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, a methoxymethyl group, a methoxyethoxyethyl group, an allyloxymethyl group, a phenoxymethyl group, a methylthiomethyl group, a tolylthiomethyl group, an ethylaminoethyl group, a diethylaminopropyl group, a morpholinopropyl group, an acetyloxymethyl group, a benzoyloxymethyl group, an N-cyclohexylcarbamoyloxyethyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoyloxyethyl group, an acetylaminoethyl group, an N-methylbenzoylaminopropyl group, a 2-oxoethyl group, a 2-oxopropyl group, a carboxypropyl group, a methoxycarbonylethyl group, an allyloxycarbonylbutyl group, a chlorophenoxycarbonylmethyl group, a carbamoylmethyl group, an N-methylcarbamoylethyl group, an N,N-dipropylcarbamoylmethyl group, an N-(methoxyphenyl)carbamoylethyl group, an N-methyl-N-(sulfophenyl)carbamoylmethyl group, a sulfobutyl group, a sulfonatobutyl group, a sulfamoylbutyl group, an N-ethylsulfamoylmethyl group, an N,N-dipropylsulfamoylpropyl group, an N-tolylsulfamoylpropyl group, an N-methyl-N-(phosphonophenyl)sulfamoyloctyl group, a phosphonobutyl group, a phosphonatohexyl group, a diethylphosphonobutyl group, a diphenylphosphonopropyl group, a methylphosphonobutyl group, a methylphosphonatobutyl group, a tolylphosphonohexyl group, a tolylphosphonatohexyl group, a phosphonooxypropyl group, a phosphonatooxybutyl group, a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, an α-methylbenzyl group, a 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl group, a p-methylbenzyl group, a cinnamyl group, an allyl group, a 1-propynylmethyl group, a 2-butenyl group, a 2-methylallyl group, 2-methylpropynylmethyl group, a 2-propynyl group, a 2-butynyl group and a 3-butynyl group.
  • Preferable examples of the aryl group represented by any one of R1, R2 and R3 include a fused ring formed from one to three benzene rings and a fused ring formed from a benzene ring and a 5-membered unsaturated ring. Specific examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, a phenanthryl group, an indenyl group, an acenaphthenyl group and a fluorenyl group. Among them, a phenyl group and a naphthyl group are more preferable.
  • Specific examples of the preferable substituted aryl group represented by any one of R1, R2 and R3 include aryl groups having a monovalent non-metallic atomic group exclusive of a hydrogen atom as a substituent on the ring-forming carbon atom of the above-described aryl group. Preferable examples of the substituent include the above-described alkyl groups and substituted alkyl groups, and the substituents described for the above-described substituted alkyl group. Specific examples of the preferable substituted aryl group include a biphenyl group, a tolyl group, a xylyl group, a mesityl group, a cumenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenyl group, a fluorophenyl group, a chloromethylphenyl group, a trifluoromethylphenyl group, a hydroxyphenyl group, a methoxyphenyl group, a methoxyethoxyphenyl group, an allyloxyphenyl group, a phenoxyphenyl group, a methylthiophenyl group, a tolylthiophenyl group, an ethylaminophenyl group, a diethylaminophenyl group, a morpholinophenyl group, an acetyloxyphenyl group, a benzoyloxyphenyl group, an N-cyclohexylcarbamoyloxyphenyl group, an N-phenylcarbamoyloxyphenyl group, an acetylaminophenyl group, an N-methylbeozoylaminophenyl group, a carboxyphenyl group, a methoxycarbonylphenyl group, an allyloxycarbonylphenyl group, a chlorophenoxycarbonylphenyl group, a carbamoylphenyl group, an N-methylcarbamoylphenyl group, an N,N-dipropylcarbamoylphenyl group, an N-(methoxyphenyl)carbamoylphenyl group, an N-methyl-N-(sulfophenyl)carbamoylphenyl group, a sulfophenyl group, a sulfonatophenyl group, a sulfamoylphenyl group, an N-ethylsulfamoylphenyl group, an N,N-dipropylsulfamoylphenyl group, an N-tolylsulfamoylphenyl group, an N-methyl-N-(phosphonophenyl)sulfamoylphenyl group, a phosphonophenyl group, a phosphonatophenyl group, a diethylphosphonophenyl group, a diphenylphosphonophenyl group, a methylphosphonophenyl group, a methylphosphonatophenyl group, a tolylphosphonophenyl group, a tolylphosphonatophenyl group, an allylphenyl group, a 1-propenylmethylphenyl group, a 2-butenylphenyl group, a 2-methylallylphenyl group, a 2-methylpropenylphenyl group, a 2-propynylphenyl group, a 2-butynylphenyl group and a 3-butynylphenyl group.
  • Examples of the preferable substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group and the preferable substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl group represented by any one of R1, R2 and R3 include those described with respect to the alkenyl group and heteroaryl group above, respectively.
  • Next, A in formula (V) will be described below. A represents an aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent or heterocyclic group which may have a substituent. Specific examples of the aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent or heterocyclic group which may have a substituent include those described for the aryl group and heteroaryl group for any one of R1, R2 and R3 in formula (V).
  • The sensitizing dye represented by formula (V) is obtained by a condensation reaction of the above-described acidic nucleus or an active methyl group-containing acidic nucleus with a substituted or unsubstituted, aromatic ring or hetero ring and can be synthesized with reference to the description of JP-B-59-28329 .
  • Preferable specific examples (D1) to (D41) of the compound represented by formula (V) are set forth below. Further, when isomers with respect to a double bond connecting an acidic nucleus and a basic nucleus are present in each of the compounds, the invention should not be construed as being limited to any one of the isomers.
    Figure imgb0080
    Figure imgb0081
    Figure imgb0082
    Figure imgb0083
    Figure imgb0084
    Figure imgb0085
    Figure imgb0086
    Figure imgb0087
    Figure imgb0088
    Figure imgb0089
    Figure imgb0090
    Figure imgb0091
    Figure imgb0092
    Figure imgb0093
    Figure imgb0094
    Figure imgb0095
    Figure imgb0096
    Figure imgb0097
    Figure imgb0098
    Figure imgb0099
  • The sensitizing dye absorbing having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 350 to 450 nm is used preferably in a range of 1.0 to 10.0% by weight, more preferably in a range of 1.5 to 8.0% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • <Infrared absorbing agent>
  • The infrared absorbing agent is a component used for increasing sensitivity to an infrared laser. The infrared absorbing agent has a function of converting the infrared ray absorbed to heat. The infrared absorbing agent for use in the invention is preferably a dye or pigment having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 760 to 1,200 nm.
  • As the dye, commercially available dyes and known dyes described in literatures, for example, Senryo Binran (Dye Handbook) compiled by The Society of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan (1970) can be used. Specifically, the dyes includes azo dyes, metal complex azo dyes, pyrazolone azo dyes, naphthoquinone dyes, anthraquinone dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, carbonium dyes, quinoneimine dyes, methine dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium salts and metal thiolate complexes.
  • Examples of preferable dye include cyanine dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-125246 , JP-A-59-84356 and JP-A-60-78787 , methine dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-173696 , JP-A-58-181690 and JP-A-58-194595 , naphthoquinone dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-112793 , JP-A-58-224793 , JP-A-59-48197 , JP-A-59-73996 , JP-A-60-52940 and JP-A-60-63744 , squarylium dyes described, for example, in JP-A-58-112792 , and cyanine dyes described, for example, in British Patent 434,875 .
  • Also, near infrared absorbing sensitizers described in U.S. Patent 5,156,938 are preferably used. Further, substituted arylbenzo(thio)pyrylium salts described in U.S. Patent 3,881,924 , trimethinethiapyrylium salts described in JP-A-57-142645 (corresponding to U.S. Patent 4,327,169 ), pyrylium compounds described in JP-A-58-181051 , JP-A-58-220143 , JP-A-59-41363 , JP-A-59-84248 , JP-A-59-84249 , JP-A-59-146063 and JP-A-59-146061 , cyanine dyes described in JP-A-59-216146 , pentamethinethiopyrylium salts described in U.S. Patent 4,283,475 , and pyrylium compounds described in JP-B-5-13514 and JP-B-5-19702 are also preferably used. Other preferred examples of the dye include near infrared absorbing dyes represented by formulae (I) and (II) in U.S. Patent 4,756,993 .
  • Other preferable examples of the infrared absorbing dye include specific indolenine cyanine dyes described in JP-A-2002-278057 as illustrated below.
    Figure imgb0100
    Figure imgb0101
    Figure imgb0102
  • Of the dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium dyes, nickel thiolate complexes and indolenine cyanine dyes are particularly preferred. Further, cyanine dyes and indolenine cyanine dyes are more preferred. As a particularly preferable example of the dye, a cyanine dye represented by the following formula (I) is exemplified.
    Figure imgb0103
  • In formula (I), X1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, -NPh2, X2-L1 or a group shown below. X2 represents an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom, L1 represents a hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an aromatic ring containing a hetero atom or a hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and containing a hetero atom. The hetero atom indicates here a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, an oxygen atom, a halogen atom or a selenium atom. Xa- has the same meaning as Za' defined hereinafter. Ra represents a substituent selected from a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted or unsubstituted amino group and a halogen atom.
    Figure imgb0104
  • R1 and R2 each independently represents a hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms. In view of the preservation stability of a coating solution for photosensitive layer, it is preferred that R1 and R2 each represents a hydrocarbon group having two or more carbon atoms, and it is particularly preferred that R1 and R2 are combined with each other to form a 5-membered or 6-membered ring.
  • Ar1 and Ar2, which may be the same or different, each represents an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Preferable examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon group include a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring. Also, preferable examples of the substituent include a hydrocarbon group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a halogen atom and an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms. Y1 and Y2, which may be the same or different, each represents a sulfur atom or a dialkylmethylene group having 12 or less carbon atoms. R3 and R4. which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrocarbon group having 20 or less carbon atoms, which may have a substituent. Preferable examples of the substituent include an alkoxy group having 12 or less carbon atoms, a carboxyl group and a sulfo group. R5, R6, R7 and R8, which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 12 or less carbon atoms. In view of the availability of raw materials, a hydrogen atom is preferred. Za- represents a counter anion. However, Za- is not necessary when the cyanine dye represented by formula (I) has an anionic substituent in the structure thereof and neutralization of charge is not needed. Preferable examples of the counter ion for Za- include a halogen ion, a perchlorate ion, a tetrafluoroborate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion and a sulfonate ion, and particularly preferable examples thereof include a perchlorate ion, a hexafluorophosphate ion and an arylsulfonate ion in view of the preservation stability of a coating solution for photosensitive layer.
  • Specific examples of the cyanine dye represented by formula (I), which can be preferably used in the invention, include those described in Paragraph Nos. [0017] to [0019] of JP-A-2001-133969 ,
  • Further, other particularly preferable examples include specific indolenine cyanine dyes described in JP-A-2002-278057 described above.
  • Examples of the pigment for use in the invention include commercially available pigments and pigments described in Colour Index (C.I.), Saishin Ganryo Binran (Handbook of the Newest Pigments) compiled by Pigment Technology Society of Japan (1977), Saishin Ganryo Oyou Gijutsu (Newest Applicarion on Technologies for Pigments), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986) and Insatsu Ink Gijutsu (Printing Ink Technology), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1984).
  • Examples of the pigment include black pigments, yellow pigments, orange pigments, brown pigments, red pigments, purple pigments, blue pigments, green pigments, fluorescent pigments, metal powder pigments and polymer-bonded dyes. Specific examples of usable pigment include insoluble azo pigments, azo lake pigments, condensed azo pigments, chelated azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, perylene and perynone pigments, thioindigo pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, dying lake pigments, azine pigments, nitroso pigments, nitro pigments, natural pigments, fluorescent pigments, inorganic pigments and carbon black. Of the pigments, carbon black is preferred.
  • The pigment may be used without undergoing surface treatment or may be used after the surface treatment. For the surface treatment, a method of coating a resin or wax on the surface, a method of attaching a surfactant and a method of bonding a reactive substance (for example, a silane coupling agent, an epoxy compound or polyisocyanate) to the pigment surface. The surface treatment methods are described in Kinzoku Sekken no Seishitsu to Oyo (properties and Applications of Metal Soap). Saiwai Shobo, Insatsu Ink Gijutsu (printing Ink Technology) CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1984), and Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu (Newest Application on Technologies for Pigments), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986).
  • The pigment has a particle size of preferably from 0.01 to 10 µm, more preferably from 0.05 to 1 µm, particularly preferably from 0.1 to 1 µm. In the above-described range, good stability and good uniformity of the pigment dispersion in the photosensitive layer can be obtained.
  • For dispersing the pigment, a known dispersion technique for use in the production of ink or toner may be used. Examples of the dispersing machine include an ultrasonic dispersing machine, a sand mill, an attritor, a pearl mill, a super-mill, a ball mill, an impeller, a disperser, a KD mill, a colloid mill, a dynatron, a three roll mill and a pressure kneader. The dispersing machines are described in detail in Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu (Newest Application on Technologies for Pigments), CMC Publishing Co., Ltd. (1986).
  • The infrared absorbing agent may be added by being incorporated into a microcapsule.
  • The amount of the infrared absorbing agent added is so controlled that absorbance of the photosensitive layer at the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 760 to 1,200 nm measured by reflection measurement is in a range of 0.3 to 1.3, preferably in a range of 0.4 to 1.2. In the above-described range, the polymerization reaction proceeds uniformly in the thickness direction of the photosensitive layer and good film strength of the image area and good adhesion property of the image area to a support are achieved.
  • The absorbance of the photosensitive layer can be controlled depending on the amount of the infrared absorbing agent added to the photosensitive layer and the thickness of the photosensitive layer. The measurement of the absorbance can be carried out in a conventional manner. The method for measurement includes, for example, a method of forming a photosensitive layer having a thickness determined appropriately in the range necessary for the lithographic printing plate precursor on a reflective support, for example, an aluminum plate, and measuring reflection density of the photosensitive layer by an optical densitometer or a spectrophotometer according to a reflection method using an integrating sphere.
  • (Co-sensitizer)
  • The sensitivity of the photosensitive layer can be further increased by using a certain additive. Such a compound is referred to as a co-sensitizer in the invention. The operation mechanism of the co-sensitizer is not quite clear but may be considered to be mostly based on the following chemical process. Specifically, the co-sensitizer reacts with various intermediate active species (for example, a radical, a peroxide, an oxidizing agent or a reducing agent) generated during the process of photo-reaction initiated by light absorption of the photopolymerization initiation system and subsequent addition-polymerization reaction to produce new active radicals. The co-sensitizers are roughly classified into (a) a compound which is reduced to produce an active radical, (b) a compound which is oxidized to produce an active radical and (c) a compound which reacts with a radical having low activity to convert it into a more highly active radical or acts as a chain transfer agent. However, in many cases, a common view about that an individual compound belongs to which type is not present.
  • (a) Compound which is reduced to produce an active radical Compound having carbon-halogen bond:
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of the carbon-halogen bond. Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a trihalomethyl-s-triazine and a trihalomethyloxadiazole.
  • Compound having nitrogen-nitrogen bond:
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of the nitrogen-nitrogen bond. Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a hexaarylbiimidazole.
  • Compound having oxygen-oxygen bond:
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of the oxygen-oxygen bond. Specific examples of the compound preferably used include an organic peroxide.
  • Onium compound:
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the reductive cleavage of a carbon-hetero bond or oxygen-nitrogen bond. Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a diaryliodonium salt, a triarylsulfonium salt and an N-alkoxypyridinium (azinium) salt.
  • Ferrocene and iron allene complexe:
  • An active radical can be reductively generated.
  • (b) Compound which is oxidized to produce an active radical Alkylate complex:
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the oxidative cleavage of a carbon-hetero bond. Specific examples of the compound preferably used include a triaryl alkyl borate.
  • Alkylamine compound:
  • An active radical is considered to be generated by the oxidative cleavage of a C-X bond on the carbon adjacent to nitrogen, wherein X is preferably a hydrogen atom, a carboxy group, a trimethylsilyl group or a benzyl group. Specific examples of the compound include an ethanolamine, an N-phenylglycine and an N-trimethylsilylmethylaniline.
  • Sulfur-containing or tin-containing compound:
  • A compound in which the nitrogen atom of the above-described amine is replaced by a sulfur atom or a tin atom is considered to generate an active radical in the same manner. Also, a compound having an S-S bond is known to effect sensitization by the cleavage of the S-S bond.
  • α-Substituted methylcarbonyl compound;
  • An active radical can be generated by the oxidative cleavage of carbonyl-α-carbon bond. The compound in which the carbonyl is converted into an oxime ether also shows the similar function. Specific examples of the compound include an 2-alkyl-1-[4-(alkylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinopronone-1 and an oxime ether obtained by a reaction of the 2-alkyl-1-[4-(alkylthio)phenyl]-2-morpholinopronone-1 with a hydroxyamine and subsequent etherification of the N-OH.
  • Sulfinic acid salt:
  • An active radical can be reductively generated. Specific examples of the compound include sodium arylsulfinate.
  • (c) Compound which reacts with a radical to convert it into a more highly active radical or acts as a chain transfer agent:
  • For example, a compound having SH, PH, SiH or GeH in its molecule is used as the compound which reacts with a radical to convert it into a more highly active radical or acts as a chain transfer agent. The compound donates hydrogen to a low active radical species to generate a radical or is oxidized and deprotonized to generate a radical. Specific examples of the compound include a 2-mercaptobenzimidazole.
  • A large number of examples of the co-sensitizer are more specifically described, for example, in JP-A-9-236913 as additives for the purpose of increasing sensitivity. Some of them are set forth below, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
    Figure imgb0105
    Figure imgb0106
    Figure imgb0107
    Figure imgb0108
  • Similarly to the above-described sensitizing dye, the co-sensitizer can be subjected to various chemical modifications so as to improve the characteristics of the photosensitive layer of the lithographic printing plate precursor. For instance, methods, for example, binding to the sensitizing dye, polymerization initiator, polymerizable compound or other radical-generating part, introduction of a hydrophilic site, introduction of a substituent for improving compatibility or inhibiting deposition of crystal, introduction of a substituent for improving adhesion property, and formation of a polymer, may be used. The co-sensitizers may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof. The amount of the co-sensitizer used is ordinarily from 0.05 to 100 parts by weight, preferably from 1 to 80 parts by weight, more preferably from 3 to 50 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight of the polymerizable compound.
  • (Microcapsule)
  • In the invention, in order to incorporate the above-described constituting components of the photosensitive layer and other constituting components described hereinafter into the photosensitive layer, a part of the constituting components is encapsulated into microcapsules and added to the photosensitive layer as described, for example, in JP-A-2001-277740 and JP-A-2001-277742 . In such a case, each constituting component may be present inside or outside the microcapsule in an appropriate ratio.
  • As a method of microencapsulating the constituting components of the photosensitive layer, known methods can be used. Methods for the production of microcapsules include, for example, a method of utilizing coacervation described in U.S. Patents 2,800,457 and 2,800,458 , a method of using interfacial polymerization described in U.S. Patent 3,287,154 , JP-B-38-19574 and JP-B-42-446 , a method of using deposition of polymer described in U.S. Patents 3,418,250 and 3,660,304 , a method of using an isocyanate polyol wall material described in U.S. Patent 3,796,669 , a method of using an isocyanate wall material described in U.S. Patent 3,914,511 , a method of using a urea-formaldehyde-type or urea-formaldehyde-resorcinol-type wall-forming material described in U.S. Patens 4,001,140, 4,087,376 and 4,089,802, a method of using a wall material, for example, a melamine-formaldehyde resin or hydroxycellulose described in U.S. Patent 4,025,445 , an in-situ method by polymerization of monomer described in JP-B-36-9163 and JP-B-51-9079 , a spray drying method described in British Patent 930,422 and U.S. Patent 3,111,407 , and an electrolytic dispersion cooling method described in British Patents 952,807 and 967,074 , but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • A preferable microcapsule wall used in the invention has three-dimensional crosslinking and has a solvent-swellable property. From this point of view, a preferable wall material of the microcapsule includes polyurea, polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyamide and a mixture thereof, and particularly polyurea and polyurethane are preferred. Further, a compound having a crosslinkable functional group, for example, an ethylenically unsaturated bond, capable of being introduced into the binder polymer described above may be introduced into the microcapsule wall.
  • The average particle size of the microcapsule is preferably from 0.01 to 3.0 µm, more preferably from 0.05 to 2.0 µm, particularly preferably from 0.10 to 1.0 µm. In the range described above, preferable resolution and good preservation stability can be achieved.
  • (Surfactant)
  • It is preferred to use a surfactant in the polymerizable composition or photosensitive layer in order to progress the developing property and to improve the state of surface coated. The surfactant includes, for example, a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an amphoteric surfactant and a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • The nonionic surfactant used in the invention is not particular restricted, and nonionic surfactants hitherto known can be used. Examples of the nonionic surfactant include polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polystyryl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene alkyl ethers, glycerin fatty acid partial esters, sorbitan fatty acid partial esters, pentaerythritol fatty acid partial esters, propylene glycol monofatty acid esters, sucrose fatty acid partial esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid partial esters, polyoxyethylene sorbitol fatty acid partial esters, polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters, polyglycerol fatty acid partial esters, polyoxyethylenated castor oils, polyoxyethylene glycerol fatty acid partial esters, fatty acid diethanolamides, N,N-bis-2-hydroxyalkylamines, polyoxyethylene alkylamines, triethanolamine fatty acid esters, trialylamine oxides, polyethylene glycols, and copolymers of polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol.
  • The anionic surfactant used in the invention is not particularly restricted and anionic surfactants hitherto known can be used. Examples of the anionic surfactant include fatty acid salts, abietic acid salts, hydroxyalkanesulfonic acid salts, alkanesulfonic acid salts, dialkylsulfosuccinic ester salts, straight-chain akylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, branched alkylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts, alkylphenoxypolyoxy ethylene propylsulfonic acid salts, polyoxyethylene alkylsulfophenyl ether salts, N-methyl-N-oleyltaurine sodium salt, N-alkylsulfosuccinic monoamide disodium salts, petroleum sulfonic acid salts, sulfated beef tallow oil, sulfate ester slats of fatty acid alkyl ester, alkyl sulfate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether sulfate ester salts, fatty acid monoglyceride sulfate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether sulfate ester salts, polyoxyethylene styrylphenyl ether sulfate ester salts, alkyl phosphate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether phosphate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether phosphate ester salts, partial saponification products of styrene/maleic anhydride copolymer, partial saponification products of olefin/maleic anhydride copolymer and naphthalene sulfonate formalin condensates.
  • The cationic surfactant used in the invention is not particularly restricted and cationic surfactants hitherto known can be used. Examples of the cationic surfactant include alkylamine salts, quaternary ammonium salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine salts and polyethylene polyamine derivatives.
  • The amphoteric surfactant used in the invention is not particularly restricted and amphoteric surfactants hitherto known can be used. Examples of the amphoteric surfactant include carboxybetaines, aminocarboxylic acids, sulfobetaines, aminosulfuric esters and imidazolines.
  • In the surfactants described above, the term "polyoxyethylene" can be replaced with "polyoxyalkylene", for example, polyoxymethylene, polyoxypropylene or polyoxybutylene, and such surfactants can also be used in the invention.
  • Further, a preferred surfactant includes a fluorine-based surfactant containing a perfluoroalkyl group in its molecule. Examples of the fluorine-based surfactant include an anionic type, for example, perfluoroalkyl carboxylates, perfluoroalkyl sulfonates or perfluoroalkylphosphates; an amphoteric type, for example, perfluoroalkyl betaines; a cationic type, for example, perfluoroalkyl trimethyl ammonium salts; and a nonionic type, for example, perfluoroalkyl amine oxides, perfluoroalkyl ethylene oxide adducts, oligomers having a perfluoroalkyl group and a hydrophilic group, oligomers having a perfluoroalkyl group and an oleophilic group, oligomers having a perfluoroalkyl group, a hydrophilic group and an oleophilic group or urethanes having a perfluoroalkyl group and an oleophilic group. Further, fluorine-based surfactants described in JP-A-62-170950 , JP-A-62-226143 and JP-A-60-168144 are also preferably exemplified.
  • The surfactants may be used individually or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • The content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 10% by weight, more preferably from 0.01 to 7% by weight, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Hydrophilic polymer)
  • In the invention, a hydrophilic polymer may be incorporated into the photosensitive layer in order to improve the developing property and dispersion stability of microcapsule. Preferable examples of the hydrophilic polymer include those having a hydrophilic group, for example, a hydroxy group, a carboxyl group, a carboxylate group, a hydroxyethyl group, a polyoxyethyl group, a hydroxypropyl group, a polyoxypropyl group, an amino group, an aminoethyl group, an aminopropyl group, an ammonium group, an amido group, a carboxymethyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
  • Specific examples of the hydrophilic polymer include gum arabic, casein, gelatin, a starch derivative, carboxymethyl cellulose or a sodium salt thereof, cellulose acetate, sodium alginate, a vinyl acetate-maleic acid copolymer, a styrene-maleic acid copolymer, polyacrylic acid or a salt thereof, polymethacrylic acid or a salt thereof, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl acrylate, polyethylene glycol, a hydroxypropylene polymer, polyvinyl alcohol, hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate having a hydrolysis degree of 60% by mole or more, preferably 80% by mole or more, polyvinyl formal, polyvinyl butyral, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, a homopolymer or polymer of acrylamide, a homopolymer or copolymer of methacrylamide, a homopolymer or copolymer of N-methylolacrylamide, an alcohol-soluble nylon, and a polyether of 2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane with epichlorohydrin.
  • The hydrophilic polymer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 5,000 or more, more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000. The hydrophilic polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer or the like.
  • The content of the hydrophilic polymer in the photosensitive layer is preferably 20% by weight or less, more preferably 10% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Coloring agent)
  • In the invention, a dye having large absorption in the visible light region can be used as a coloring agent for the image. Specific examples thereof include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, Oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (CI42555), Methyl Violet (CI42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI45170B), Malachite Green (CI42000), Methylene Blue (CI52015), and dyes described in JP-A-62-293247 . Also, a pigment, for example, phthalocyanine-based pigment, azo-based pigment, carbon black and titanium oxide can be preferably used.
  • It is preferable to add the coloring agent, because the image area and the non-image area after the image formation can be easily distinguished. The amount of the coloring agent added is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Print-out agent)
  • In the photosensitive layer according to the invention, a compound capable of undergoing discoloration by the effect of an acid or a radical can be added in order to form a print-out image. As such a compound, for example, various dyes, e.g., diphenylmethane-based, triphenylmethane-based, thiazine-based, oxazine-based, xanthene-based, anthraquinone-based, iminoquinone-based, azo-based and azomethine-based dyes are effectively used.
  • Specific examples thereof include dyes, for example, Brilliant Green, Ethyl Violet, Methyl Green, Crystal Violet, Basic Fuchsine, Methyl Violet 2B, Quinaldine Red, Rose Bengale, Metanil Yellow, Thymolsulfophthalein, Xylenol Blue, Methyl Orange, Paramethyl Red, Congo Red, Benzopurpurine 4B, α-Naphthyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malachite Green, Parafuchsine, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (produced by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), Oil Blue #603 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Pink #312 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red 5B (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Scarlet #308 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red OG (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red RR (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Green #502 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Spiron Red BEH Special (produced by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), m-Cresol Purple, Cresol Red, Rhodamine B, Rhodamine 6G, Sulforhodamine B, Auramine, 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxyanilino-4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxystearylamino-4-p-N,N-bis(hydroxyethyl)aminophenylinninonaphthoquinone, 1-phenyl-3-methyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone and 1-β-naphthyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone, and leuco dyes, for example, p,p',p''-hexamethyltriaminotriphenyl methane (leuco Crystal Violet) and Pergascript Blue SRB (produced by Ciba Geigy).
  • Other preferable examples include leuco dyes known as a material for heat-sensitive paper or pressure-sensitive paper. Specific examples thereof include Crystal Violet Lactone, Malachite Green Lactone, Benzoyl Leuco Methylene Blue, 2-(N-phenyl-N-methylamino)-6-(N-p-tolyl-N-ethyl)aminofluorane, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6-(N-ethyl-p-toluidino)fluorane, 3,6-dimethoxyfluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-5-methyl-7-(N,N-dibenzylamino)fluorane, 3-(N-cyclohexyl-N-methylamino)-6-methyl-7-aniliaofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-xylidinofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-chlorofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methoxy-7-aminofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-(4-chloroanilino)fluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylarnino)-7-chlorofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-benzylaminofluorane, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7,8-benzofluorane, 3-(N,N-dibutylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-(N,N-dibutylamino)-6-methyl-7-xylidinofluorane, 3-piperidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-pyrrolidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3,3-bis(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(1-n-butyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(p-dimethylaminophenyl)-6-dimethylaminophthalide, 3-(4-diethylamino-2-ethoxyphenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)-4-phthalide and 3-(4-diethylaminophenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide.
  • The dye capable of undergoing discoloration by the effect of an acid or a radical is preferably added in an amount of 0.01 to 15% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Polymerization inhibitor)
  • To the photosensitive layer according to the invention, a small amount of a thermal polymerization inhibitor is preferably added in order to prevent the polymerizable compound from undergoing undesirable thermal polymerization during the production or preservation of the photosensitive layer.
  • Preferable examples of the thermal polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butyl catechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol) and N-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt.
  • The amount of the thermal polymerization inhibitor added is preferably from about 0.01 to about 5% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Higher fatty acid derivative)
  • In the photosensitive layer according to the invention, for example, a higher fatty acid derivative, e.g., behenic acid or behenic acid amide may be added and localized on the surface of the photosensitive layer during the process of drying after coating in order to avoid polymerization inhibition due to oxygen. The amount of the higher fatty acid derivative added is preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Plasticizer)
  • The photosensitive layer according to the invention may contain a plasticizer. Preferable examples of the plasticizer include a phthalic acid ester, for example, dimethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, diisobutyl phthalate, diocyl phthalate, octyl capryl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, ditridecyl phthalate, butyl benzyl phthalate, diisodecyl phthalate or diallyl phthalate; a glycol ester, for example, dimethyl glycol phthalate, ethyl phthalylethyl glycolate, methyl phthalylethyl glycolate, butyl phthalylbutyl glycolate or triethylene glycol dicaprylic acid ester; a phosphoric acid ester, for example, tricresyl phosphate or triphenyl phosphate; an aliphatic dibasic acid ester, for example, diisobutyl adipate, dioctyl adipate, dimethyl sebacate, dibutyl sebacate, dioctyl azelate or dibutyl maleate; polyglycidyl methacrylate, triethyl citrate, glycerin triacetyl ester and butyl laurate. The content of the plasticizer is preferably about 30% by weight or less based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Fine inorganic particle)
  • The photosensitive layer according to the invention may contain fine inorganic particle in order to increase strength of the cured layer in the image area. The fine inorganic particle preferably includes, for example, silica, alumina, magnesium oxide, titanium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium alginate and a mixture thereof. Even if the fine inorganic particle has no light-to-heat converting property, it can be used, for example, for strengthening the layer or enhancing interfacial adhesion property due to surface roughening. The fine inorganic particle preferably has an average particle size from 5 nm to 10 µm, more preferably from 0.5 to 3 µm. In the range described above, it is stably dispersed in the photosensitive layer, sufficiently maintains the film strength of the photosensitive layer and can form the non-image area excellent in hydrophilicity and preventing from the occurrence of stain at the printing.
  • The fine inorganic particle described above is easily available as a commercial product, for example, colloidal silica dispersion.
  • The content of the fine inorganic particle is preferably 20% by weight or less, more preferably 10% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive layer.
  • (Hydrophilic low molecular weight compound)
  • The photosensitive layer according to the invention may contain a hydrophilic low molecular weight compound in order to improve the developing property. The hydrophilic low molecular weight compound includes a water-soluble organic compound, for example, a glycol compound, e.g., ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol or tripropylene glycol, or an ether or ester derivative thereof, a polyhydroxy compound, e.g., glycerine or pentaerythritol, an organic amine, e.g., triethanol amine, diethanol amine or monoethanol amine, or a salt thereof, an organic sulfonic acid, e.g., toluene sulfonic acid or benzene sulfonic acid, or a salt thereof, an organic phosphonic acid, e.g., phenyl phosphonic acid, or a salt thereof, an organic carboxylic acid, e.g., tartaric acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, maleic acid, lactic acid, gluconic acid or an amino acid, or a salt thereof, and an organic quaternary ammonium salt, e.g., tetraethyl ammonium hydrochloride.
  • (Formation of photosensitive layer)
  • The photosensitive layer according to the invention is formed by dispersing or dissolving each of the necessary constituting components described above in a solvent to prepare a coating solution and coating the solution. The solvent used include, for example, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-methxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, dimethoxyethane, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetramethylurea, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, γ-butyrolactone, toluene and water, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto. The solvents may be used individually or as a mixture, The solid concentration of the coating solution is preferably from 1 to 50% by weight.
  • The photosensitive layer according to the invention may also be formed by preparing plural coating solutions by dispersing or dissolving the same or different components described above into the same or different solvents and conducting repeatedly plural coating and drying.
  • The coating amount (solid content) of the photosensitive layer after the coating and drying on the support may be varied depending on the use but ordinarily, it is preferably from 0.3 to 3.0 g/m2. In the range described above, the preferable sensitivity and good film property of the photosensitive layer can be obtained.
  • Various methods can be used for the coating. Examples of the method include bar coater coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating.
  • [Protective layer]
  • In the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention, a protective layer (oxygen-blocking layer) is preferably provided on the photosensitive layer in order to prevent diffusion and penetration of oxygen which inhibits the polymerization reaction at the time of exposure. The protective layer for use in the invention preferably has oxygen permeability (A) at 25°C under one atmosphere of 1.0 ≤ (A) ≤ 20 (ml/m2·day), When the oxygen permeability (A) is extremely lower than 1.0 (ml/m2·day), problems may occur in that an undesirable polymerization reaction arises during the production or preservation before image exposure and in that undesirable fog or spread of image line occurs at the image exposure. On the contrary, when the oxygen permeability (A) greatly exceeds 20 (ml/m2·day), decrease in sensitivity may be incurred. The oxygen permeability (A) is more preferably in a range of 1.5 ≤ (A) ≤ 12 (ml/m2·day), still more preferably in a range of 2.0 ≤ (A) ≤ 10.0 (ml/m2·day). Besides the above described oxygen permeability, as for the characteristics required of the protective layer, it is desired that the protective layer does not substantially hinder the transmission of light for the exposure, is excellent in the adhesion property to the photosensitive layer, and can be easily removed during a development step after the exposure. Contrivances on the protective layer have been heretofore made and described in detail in U.S. Patent 3,458,311 and JP-B-55-49729 .
  • As the material of the protective layer, a water-soluble polymer compound relatively excellent in crystallizability is preferably used. Specifically, a water-soluble polymer, for example, polyvinyl alcohol, vinyl alcohol/vinyl phthalate copolymer, vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol/vinyl phthalate copolymer, vinyl acetate/crotonic acid copolymer, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acidic cellulose, gelatin, gum arabic, polyacrylic acid or polyacrylamide is enumerated. The water-soluble polymer compounds may be used individually or as a mixture. Of the compounds, when polyvinyl alcohol is used as a main component, the best results can be obtained in the fundamental characteristics, for example, oxygen-blocking property and removability of the protective layer by development.
  • Polyvinyl alcohol for use in the protective layer may be partially substituted with ester, ether or acetal as long as it contains unsubstituted vinyl alcohol units for achieving the necessary oxygen-blocking property and water solubility. Also, a part of polyvinyl alcohol may have other copolymer component. As specific examples of the polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl alcohols having a hydrolysis degree of 71 to 100% and a polymerization repeating unit number of 300 to 2,400 are exemplified. Specific examples thereof include PVA-105, PVA-110, PVA-117, PVA-117H, PVA-120, PVA-124, PVA-124H, PVA-CS, PVA-CST, PVA-HC, PVA-203, PVA-204, PVA-205, PVA-210, PVA-217, PVA-220, PVA-224, PVA-217EE, PVA-217E, PVA-220E, PVA-224E, PVA-405, PVA-420, PVA-613 and L-8 (produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd.). They can be used individually or as a mixture. According to a preferred embodiment, the content of polyvinyl alcohol in the protective layer is from 20 to 95% by weight, more preferably from 30 to 90% by weight.
  • Also, known modified polyvinyl alcohol can be preferably used. For instance, polyvinyl alcohols of various polymerization degrees having at random a various kind of hydrophilic modified cites, for example, an anion-modified cite modified with an anion, e.g., a carboxyl group or a sulfo group, a cation-modified cite modified with a cation, e.g., an amino group or an ammonium group, a silanol-modified cite or a thiol-modified cite, and polyvinyl alcohols of various polymerization degrees having at the terminal of the polymer a various kind of modified cites, for example, the above-described anion-modified cite, cation modified cite, silanol-modified cite or thiol-modified cite, an alkoxy-modified cite, a sulfide-modified cite, an ester modified cite of vinyl alcohol with a various kind of organic acids, an ester modified cite of the above-described anion-modified cite with an alcohol or an epoxy-modified cite are exemplified.
  • As a component used as a mixture with polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone or a modified product thereof is preferable from the viewpoint of the oxygen-blocking property and removability by development. The content thereof is ordinarily from 3.5 to 80% by weight, preferably from 10 to 60% by weight, more preferably from 15 to 30% by weight, in the protective layer.
  • The components of the protective layer (selection of PVA and use of additives) and the coating amount are determined taking into consideration fog-preventing property, adhesion property and scratch resistance besides the oxygen-blocking property and removability by development. In general, the higher the hydrolyzing rate of the PVA used (the higher the unsubstituted vinyl alcohol unit content in the protective layer) and the larger the layer thickness, the higher is the oxygen-blocking property, thus it is advantageous in the point of sensitivity. The molecular weight of the polymer compound, for example, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) is ordinarily from 2,000 to 10,000,000, preferably from 20,000 to 3,000,000.
  • As other additive of the protective layer, glycerin, dipropylene glycol or the like can be added in an amount corresponding to several % by weight of the polymer compound to provide flexibility. Further, an anionic surfactant, for example, sodium alkylsulfate or sodium alkylsulfonate; an amphoteric surfactant, for example, alkylaminocarboxylate and alkylaminodicarboxylate; or a nonionic surfactant, for example, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether can be added in an amount corresponding to several % by weight of the polymer compound.
  • The adhesion property of the protective layer to the photosensitive layer and scratch resistance are also extremely important in view of handling of the printing plate precursor. Specifically, when a hydrophilic layer comprising a water-soluble polymer is laminated on the oleophilic photosensitive layer, layer peeling due to an insufficient adhesion property is liable to occur, and the peeled portion causes such a defect as failure in curing of the photosensitive layer due to polymerization inhibition by oxygen. Various proposals have been made for improving the adhesion property between the photosensitive layer and the protective layer. For example, it is described in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 292,501 and 44,563 that a sufficient adhesion property can be obtained by mixing from 20 to 60% by weight of an acryl-based emulsion or a water-insoluble vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer with a hydrophilic polymer mainly comprising polyvinyl alcohol and laminating the resulting mixture on the photosensitive layer. Any of these known techniques can be applied to the protective layer according to the invention. Coating methods of the protective layer are described in detail, for example, in U.S. Patent 3,458,311 and JP-B-55-49729 .
  • Further, it is also preferred to incorporate an inorganic stratiform compound into the protective layer of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention for the purpose of improving the oxygen-blocking property and property for protecting the surface of photosensitive layer.
  • The inorganic stratiform compound used here is a particle having a thin tabular shape and includes, for instance, mica, for example, natural mica represented by the following formula: A (B, C)2-5 D4 O10 (OH, F, O)2, (wherein A represents any one of K, Na and Ca, B and C each represents any one of Fe (II), Fe(III), Mn, Al, Mg and V, and D represents Si or Al) or synthetic mica; talc represented by the following formula: 3MgO·4SiO·H2O; teniolite; montmorillonite; saponite; hectolite; and zirconium phosphate.
  • Of the micas, examples of the natural mica include muscovite, paragonite, phlogopite, biotite and lepidolite. Examples of the synthetic mica include non-swellable mica, for example, fluorphlogopite KMg3(AlSi3O10)F2 or potassium tetrasilic mica KMg2.5(Si4O10)F2, and swellable mica, for example, Na tetrasilic mica NaM2.5(Si4O10)F2, Na or Li teniolite (Na, Li)Mg2Li(Si4O10)F2, or montmorillonite based Na or Li hectolite (Na, Li)1/8Mg2/5Li)1/8(Si4O10)F2. Synthetic smectite is also useful.
  • Of the inorganic stratiform compounds, fluorine based swellable mica, which is a synthetic inorganic stratiform compound, is particularly useful in the invention. Specifically, the swellable synthetic mica and an swellable clay mineral, for example, montmorillonite, saponite, hectolite or bentonite have a stratiform structure comprising a unit crystal lattice layer having thickness of approximately 10 to 15 angstroms, and metallic atom substitution in the lattices thereof is remarkably large in comparison with other clay minerals. As a result, the lattice layer results in lack of positive charge and in order to compensate it, a cation, for example, Na+, Ca2+ or Mg2+, is adsorbed between the lattice layers. The cation existing between the lattice layers is referred to as an exchangeable cation and is exchangeable with various cations. In particular, in the case where the cation between the lattice layers is Li+ or Na+, because of a small ionic radius, a bond between the stratiform crystal lattices is week, and the inorganic stratiform compound greatly swells upon contact with water. When share is applied under such condition, the stratiform crystal lattices are easily cleaved to form a stable sol in water. The bentnite and swellable synthetic mica have strongly such tendency and are useful in the invention. Particularly, the swellable synthetic mica is preferably used.
  • With respect to the shape of the inorganic stratiform compound used in the invention, the thinner the thickness or the larger the plain size as long as smoothness of coated surface and transmission of actinic radiation are not damaged, the better from the standpoint of control of diffusion. Therefore, an aspect ratio of the inorganic stratiform compound is ordinarily 20 or more, preferably 100 or more, particularly preferably 200 or more. The aspect ratio is a ratio of thickness to major axis of particle and can be determined, for example, from a projection drawing of particle by a microphotography. The larger the aspect ratio, the greater the effect obtained.
  • As for the particle size of the inorganic stratiform compound used in the invention, an average major axis is ordinarily from 0.3 to 20 µm, preferably from 0.5 to 10 µm, particularly preferably from 1 to 5 µm. An average thickness of the particle is ordinarily 0.1 µm or less, preferably 0.05 µm or less, particularly preferably 0.01 µm or less. For example, in the swellable synthetic mica that is the representative compound of the inorganic stratiform compounds, thickness is approximately from 1 to 50 nm and plain size is approximately from 1 to 20 µm.
  • When such an inorganic stratiform compound particle having a large aspect ratio is incorporated into the protective layer, strength of coated layer increases and penetration of oxygen or moisture can be effectively inhibited so that the protective layer can be prevented from deterioration due to deformation, and even when the lithographic printing plate precursor is preserved for a long period of time under a high humidity condition, it is prevented from decrease in the image-forming property thereof due to the change of humidity and exhibits excellent preservation stability.
  • The content of the inorganic stratiform compound in the protective layer is preferably from 5/1 to 1/100 in terms of weight ratio to the amount of binder used in the protective layer. When a plurality of inorganic stratiform compounds is used in combination, it is also preferred that the total amount of the inorganic stratiform compounds fulfills the above-described weight ratio.
  • An example of common dispersing method for the inorganic stratiform compound used in the protective layer is described below. Specifically, from 5 to 10 parts by weight of a swellable stratiform compound that is exemplified as a preferred inorganic stratiform compound is added to 100 parts by weight of water to adapt the compound to water and to be swollen, followed by dispersing using a dispersing machine. The dispersing machine used include, for example, a variety of mills conducting dispersion by directly applying mechanical power, a high-speed agitation type dispersing machine providing a large shear force and a dispersion machine providing ultrasonic energy of high intensity. Specific examples thereof include a ball mill, a sand grinder mill, a visco mill, a colloid mill, a homogenizer, a dissolver, a polytron, a homomixer, a homoblender, a keddy mill, a jet agitor, a capillary type emulsifying device, a liquid siren, an electromagnetic strain type ultrasonic generator and an emulsifying device having a Polman whistle. A dispersion containing from 5 to 10% by weight of the inorganic stratiform compound thus prepared is highly viscous or gelled and exhibits extremely good preservation stability. In the formation of a coating solution for protective layer using the dispersion, it is preferred that the dispersion is diluted with water, sufficiently stirred and then mixed with a binder solution.
  • To the coating solution for protective layer can be added known additives, for example, a surfactant for improving coating property or a water-soluble plasticizer for improving physical property of coated layer in addition to the inorganic stratiform compound. Examples of the water-soluble plasticizer include propionamide, cyclohexanediol, glycerin or sorbitol. Also, a water-soluble (meth)acrylic polymer can be added. Further, to the coating solution may be added known additives for increasing adhesion property to the photosensitive layer or for improving preservation stability of the coating solution.
  • The coating solution for protective layer thus-prepared is coated on the photosensitive layer and dried to form a protective layer. The coating solvent may be appropriately selected in view of the binder used, and when a water-soluble polymer is used, distilled water or purified water is preferably used as the solvent. A coating method of the protective layer is not particularly limited, and known methods, for example, methods described in U.S. Patent 3,458,311 and JP-B-55-49729 can be utilized. Specific examples of the coating method for the protective layer include a blade coating method, an air knife coating method, a gravure coating method, a roll coating method, a spray coating method, a dip coating method and a bar coating method.
  • The coating amount of the protective layer is preferably in a range of 0.05 to 10 g/m2 in terms of the coating amount after drying. When the protective layer contains the inorganic stratiform compound, it is more preferably in a range of 0.1 to 0.5 g/m2, and when the protective layer does not contain the inorganic stratiform compound, it is more preferably in a range of 0.5 to 5 g/m2.
  • [Backcoat layer]
  • A backcoat layer may be provided on the back surface of the support, if desired. The backcoat layer preferably includes, for example, a coating layer comprising an organic polymer compound described in JP-A-5-45885 and a coating layer comprising a metal oxide obtained by hydrolysis and polycondensation of an organic metal compound or an inorganic metal compound described in JP-A-6-35174 . Among them, use of an alkoxy compound of silicon, for example, Si(OCH3)4, Si(OC2H5)4, Si(OC3H7)4 or Si(OC4H9)4 is preferred since the starting material is inexpensive and easily available.
  • Now, a heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor is described below.
  • <Heat fusion type image-forming layer>
  • The image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor contains a heat fusible fine particle. The heat fusible fine particle may be a fused form, that is, may have a structure of a latex film.
  • As the heat fusible fine particle for use in the invention, a heat fusible polymer fine particle is preferable.
  • Specific examples of the polymer for forming the fine particle include a homopolymer or copolymer obtained from a monomer, for example, ethylene, styrene, vinyl chloride, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, vinylidene chloride, acrylonitrile or vinyl carbazole and a mixture thereof. Of the polymers, polystyrene and polymethyl methacrylate are preferable.
  • The fine particle can be produced, for example, by an emulsion polymerization, a suspension polymerization, a method (solvent evaporation method) wherein a polymer is dissolved in an organic solvent, the solution is emulsified and dispersed in water and then the solvent is evaporated or a mechanical dispersion method.
  • As the heat fusible polymer for forming the heat fusible fine particle for use in the invention, a polymer having a functional group (heat reactive group) reacting by heat is also used. The polymer having the heat reactive group is preferable in view of forming a strong image.
  • Examples of the heat reactive group include an ethylenically unsaturated group (for example, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a vinyl group or an allyl group) for conducting a polymerization reaction, an isocyanato group or a blocked isocyanato group and as a reaction partner, a functional group (for example, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a carboxyl group) having an active hydrogen atom for conducting an addition reaction, an epoxy group and as a reaction partner, an amino group, a hydroxy group or a carboxyl group for conducting an addition reaction, a carboxyl group and a hydroxy group or an amino group for conducting a condensation reaction, and an acid anhydride and an amino group or a hydroxy group for conducting a ring-opening addition reaction. However, any functional group for conducting a reaction may be used as long as the functional group can form a chemical bond by heat fusion.
  • The introduction of the heat reactive group into a polymer particle may be carried out at the time of polymerization of fine particulate polymer or may be carried out using a polymer reaction after the polymerization of fine particulate polymer.
  • In the case of introducing the heat reactive group at the time of polymerization of fine particulate polymer, it is preferred that a monomer having the heat reactive group is subjected to emulsion polymerization or suspension polymerization, Examples of the monomer having such a functional group include allyl methacrylate, allyl acrylate, vinyl methacrylate, vinyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, 2-isocyanatoethyl methacrylate or its blocked isocyanato, for example, with an alcohol, 2-isocyanatoethyl acrylate or its blocked isocyanato, for example, with an alcohol, 2-aminoethyl methacrylate, 2-aminoethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic anhydride, a difunctional acrylate and a difunctinal methacrylate, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • In the case of introducing the heat reactive group at the time of polymerization, it is also possible to copolymerize a monomer having no such a heat reactive group with the monomer having the heat reactive group. Examples of the copolymerizable monomer having no such a heat reactive group include styrene, alkyl acrylate, alkyl methacrylate, acrylonitrile and vinyl acetate, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto and any monomer having no such a heat reactive group may be used.
  • The polymerization reaction using for the case of introduction of the heat reactive group after the polymerization of fine particulate polymer includes, for example, polymer reactions described in WO 96/34316 .
  • The weight average molecular weight of any of the polymer fine particle having no heat reactive group and the polymer fine particle having heat reactive group is suitably in a range of 2,000 to 1,000,000.
  • The average particle size of the polymer fine particle is preferably from 0.01 to 20 µm, more preferably from 0.03 to 1.00 µm, particularly preferably from 0.05 to 0.40 µm, from the standpoint of achieving a good balance between the image-forming property and developing property.
  • In view of the image-formation, it is preferred that the polymer fine particle contains a light-to-heat converting agent because of good heat efficiency at the time of exposure. The polymer fine particle containing a light-to-heat converting agent can be obtained by dissolving the light-to-heat converting agent together with the polymer in a water-insoluble organic solvent in the solvent evaporation method described above.
  • A hydrophilic resin may be added to the image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention. By the addition of the hydrophilic resin, not only the developing property in an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 but also the film strength of the image-forming layer per se are improved. A hydrophilic resin having no three-dimensional crosslinkage structure is preferable as the hydrophilic resin because of good developing property.
  • Preferable examples of the hydrophilic resin include resins having a hydrophilic group, for example, a hydroxy group, a carboxyl group, a hydroxyethyl group, a hydroxypropyl group, an amino group, an aminoethyl group, an aminopropyl group and a carboxymethyl group.
  • Specific examples of the hydrophilic resin include arabic gum, casein, gelatin, a starch derivative, soya gum, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose or sodium salt thereof, cellulose acetate, sodium alginate, a vinyl acetate-maleic acid copolymer, a styrene-maleic acid copolymer, polyacrylic acid or a salt thereof, polymethacrylic acid or a salt thereof, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxyethyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxypropyl acrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl methacrylate, a homopolymer or copolymer of hydroxybutyl acrylate, polyethylene glycol, a hydroxypropylene polymer, polyvinyl alcohol, hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate having a hydrolysis degree of 60% by weight or more, preferably 80% by weight or more, polyvinyl formal, polyvinyl butyral, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, a homopolymer or copolymer of acrylamide, a homopolymer or copolymer of methacrylamide, a homopolymer or copolymer of N-methylolacrylamide and 2-acrylarnido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid or a salt thereof.
  • The amount of the hydrophilic resin added to the image-forming layer is preferably from 2 to 40% by weight, more preferably from 3 to 30% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer from the standpoint of good developing property and high printing durability.
  • To the image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention may be added various compounds, for example, a light-to-heat converting agent which absorbs light to generate heat, an inorganic fine particle, a surfactant, a coloring agent or a plasticizer, if desired, in addition to the resin fine particle and hydrophilic resin, for various purposes, for example, of improving sensitivity, controlling degree of hydrophilicity, improving physical strength of the image-forming layer, improving mutual dispersibility of components constituting the layer, improving coating property, improving printing aptitude, or increasing workability in plate making. The compounds added are described below.
  • The light-to-heat converting agent may be a substance capable of absorbing light of 700 nm or more and various pigments, dyes and metal fine particles can be used. Specific examples of the light-to-heat converting agent include the inferred absorbing agents described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • Preferable examples of the inorganic fine particle include silica, alumina, magnesium oxide, titanium oxide, magnesium carbonate, potassium alginate and a mixture thereof. The inorganic fine particle can be used for strengthening film or increasing an interfacial adhesion property due to surface roughening even if it does not have the light-to-heat converting property.
  • The average particle size of the inorganic fine particle is preferably from 5 nm to 10 µm, more preferably from 10 nm to 1 µm. In the range of the average particle size described above, the inorganic fine particle is stably dispersed together with the resin fine particle and metal fine particle as the light-to-heat converting agent in the hydrophilic resin to sufficiently maintain the film strength of the image-forming layer and to form the non-image area excellent in the hydrophilicity and prevented from printing stain.
  • The inorganic fine particle is easily available as a commercial product, for example, colloidal silica dispersion. The content of the inorganic fine particle in the image-forming layer is preferably from 1.0 to 70% by weight, more preferably from 5.0 to 50% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • To the image-forming layer may be added a surfactant, for example, a nonionic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant as described in JP-A-2-195396 , a fluorine-containing surfactant or an amphoteric surfactant as described in JP-A-59-121044 and JP-A-4-13149 , in order to enlarge stability against the variations of printing conditions.
  • The content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.05 to 15% by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 5% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • In order to easily distinguish the image area and the non-image area after the image formation, a dye having large absorption in the visible light region can be used as a coloring agent for the image in the image-forming layer. Specific examples of the coloring agent include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, Oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS, Oil Black T-505 (produced by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (C142555), Methyl Violet (CI42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI45170B), Malachite Green (CI42000), Methylene Blue (CI52015), and dyes described in JP-A-62-293247 . Also, a pigment, for example, phthalocyanine-based pigment, azo-based pigment and titanium oxide can be preferably used. The amount of the coloring agent added is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by weight based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer.
  • A plasticizer may be added to the image-forming layer in order to impart flexibility or the like of the coated film. For example, polyethylene glycol, tributyl citrate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, dihexyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate, trioctyl phosphate or tetrahydrofurfuryl oleate is used.
  • The image-forming layer is formed by dissolving or dispersing each of the necessary constituting components described above in water or a mixed solvent including an organic solvent, if desired, to prepare a coating solution and coating the solution. The solid concentration of the coating solution is preferably from 1 to 50% by weight.
  • Various methods can be used for the coating. Examples of the method include bar coater coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating. The coating amount (solid content) of the image-forming layer after the coating and drying on the support may be varied depending on the use but ordinarily, it is preferably from 0.5 to 5.0 g/m2, more preferably from 0.5 to 2.0 g/m2.
  • The concentration of the solid content of the image-forming layer in the coating solution is preferably from 2 to 20% by weight, more preferably from 5 to 15% by weight. In the range described above, good dispersibility of the fine particle in the coating solution and good fusion of the polymer fine particle after coating and drying the coating solution to from the image-forming layer.
  • According to the invention, a hydrophilic layer may be provided between the support and the image-forming layer. A preferable hydrophilic layer is a hydrophilic layer which is three-dimensionally crosslinked, is not dissolved in dampening water at lithographic printing using dampening water and/or ink and contains a colloid shown below.
  • Specifically, a colloid comprising a sol-gel conversion system of an oxide or hydroxide of beryllium, magnesium, aluminum, silicon, titanium, boron, germanium, tin, zirconium, iron, vanadium, antimony or a transition metal is used. A colloid comprising a complex of the elements is also used, The colloid has the structure including the network structure formed by the element described above through an oxygen atom and the unbonded hydroxy group or alkoxy group in mixture.
  • A hydrophilic overcoat layer can be provided on the image-forming layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention for protecting the hydrophilic surface of image-forming layer from contamination due to a lipophilic substance during the preservation or finger mark contamination due to touch with finger at the handling.
  • As the hydrophilic overcoat layer, a layer same as the protective layer described for the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor can be used.
  • In order to enhance the absorption efficiency of infrared ray and to increase sensitivity, it is preferred to add a light-to-heat converting agent which absorbs infrared ray to generate heat to at least one of the image-forming layer, hydrophilic layer and overcoat layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • Now, a polarity conversion type lithographic printing plate precursor is described below.
  • <Polarity conversion type image-forming layer>
  • The polarity conversion type image-forming layer is an image-forming layer having a property capable of changing hydrophilicity-hydrophobicity in the exposed area by laser exposure and it includes two types image-forming layers, specifically, (1) a negative type image-forming layer having a property changing from hydrophilic to hydrophobic by the laser exposure and (2) a positive type image-forming layer having a property changing from hydrophobic to hydrophilic by the laser exposure. Each of the image-forming layers will be described below.
  • As the negative type image-forming layer changing from hydrophilic to hydrophobic by the laser exposure, image-forming layers described, for example, in JP-A-2000-122272 are preferably used. As the image-forming layer of such a type, a layer containing a binder polymer having a specific functional group, particularly, at least any group selected from a carboxylic acid group and carboxylate group capable of undergoing decarboxylation by heat is preferable.
  • The polymer having at least any group selected from a carboxylic acid group and carboxylate group capable of undergoing decarboxylation by heat is not particularly restricted and polymers represented by formulae (1) and (2) shown below are preferable.
    Figure imgb0109
    Figure imgb0110
  • In formulae (1) and (2), X represents a group selected from elements of group 4 to group 6, oxides thereof, sulfides thereof, selenides thereof and tellurides thereof, P represents a polymer main chain, L represents a divalent connecting group, R1 and R2, which may be the same or different, each represents a monovalent group, and M represents a group selected from an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal and an onium.
  • R1 and R2 each preferably includes a straight-chain alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms and a cyclic alkyl group having from 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • L preferably includes structural units shown below and combinations thereof.
    Figure imgb0111
    Figure imgb0112
    Figure imgb0113
    Figure imgb0114
    Figure imgb0115
    Figure imgb0116
  • X preferably includes -CO-, -SO- and -SO2-.
  • M preferably includes a metal cation of monovalent to tetravalent and an ammonium salt represented by formula (3) shown below.
    Figure imgb0117
  • In formula (3), R4, R5, R6 and R7, which may be the same or different, each represents a monovalent group.
  • The polymer main chain skeleton represented by P is not particularly restricted and preferably includes, for example, a (meth)acrylic resin and a urethane resin.
  • The binder polymer used in the image-forming layer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or more, more preferably in a range of 5,000 to 300,000, and a number average molecular weight of 800 or more, more preferably in a range of 1,000 to 250,000. The polydispersity (weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight) is preferably 1 or more, more preferably in a range of 1.1 to 10. The binder polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer and the like, and it is preferably a random polymer.
  • The content of the binder polymer is ordinarily from 50 to 95% by weight, preferably from 70 to 90% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer. When the content is less than 50% by weight, the printing image may become unclear in some cases, whereas the content exceeds 95% by weight, the formation of image by laser exposure may not be sufficiently performed in some cases.
  • The image-forming layer may contain other constituting components, if desired, in addition to the binder polymer described above as long as the effects of the invention are not damaged. Examples of the constituting component other than the binder polymer include various additives, for example, the polymerizable compound, sensitizing dye and polymerization initiator as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor and the heat fusible fine particle, light-to-heat converting agent, hydrophilic polymer, inorganic fine particle, surfactant, coloring agent and plasticizer as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • As the positive type image-forming layer changing from hydrophobic to hydrophilic by the laser exposure, image-forming layers described, for example, in JP-A-11-174685 are preferably used. As the image-forming layer of such a type, a layer containing a hydrophobic binder polymer (hereinafter, also referred to as a "heat-sensitive binder polymer") having a specific functional group and changing to hydrophilic upon energy generated by laser exposure is preferable. The heat-sensitive binder polymer is a binder polymer which ordinarily does not exhibit affinity for water, for example, water-soluble or water-swellable property, but exhibits the affinity for water, for example, water-soluble or water-swellable property, when the its structure is partially or wholly changed by heat. Examples of such a polymer include a hydrophobic binder polymer having a functional group represented by any one of formulae (4) to (8) shown below in its side chain.

             -L-SO2-Q-R1     Formula (4):

             -L-SO2-SO2-R2     Formula (5):

    Figure imgb0118
    Figure imgb0119
  • In formulae (4) to (8), L represents a polyvalent organic group comprising a nonmetallic atom connecting to a main chain of the hydrophobic binder polymer, R1 represents an aryl group, an alkyl group or a cyclic imido group, R2 and R3 each independently represents an aryl group or an alkyl group, R4 represents an aryl group, an alkyl group or a -SO2R5 group, R5 represents an aryl group or an alkyl group, R6, R7 and R8 each independently represents an aryl group or an alkyl group, or appropriate two or three of R6, R7 and R8 may combined with each other to from a ring, one of R9 and R10 represents a hydrogen atom and the other represents a hydrogen atom, an aryl group or an alkyl group, R11 represents an alkyl group, or R9 and R11 or R10 and R11 may be combined with each other to from a ring. The polyvalent connecting group comprising a nonmetallic atom for L comprises from 1 to 60 carbon atoms, from 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, from 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, from 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms and from 0 to 20 sulfur atoms. Specifically, L includes the structural unit described for the preferable examples of L in formula (1) or (2) above and combinations thereof.
  • The heat-sensitive binder polymer used in the image-forming layer preferably has a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or more, more preferably in a range of 5,000 to 300,000, and a number average molecular weight of 800 or more, more preferably in a range of 1,000 to 250,000. The polydispersity (weight average molecular weight/number average molecular weight) is preferably 1 or more, more preferably in a range of 1.1 to 10. The binder polymer may be any of a random polymer, a block polymer, a graft polymer and the like, and it is preferably a random polymer.
  • The content of the heat-sensitive binder polymer is ordinarily from 50 to 95% by weight, preferably from 70 to 90% by weight, based on the total solid content of the image-forming layer. When the content is less than 50% by weight, the printing image may become unclear in some cases, whereas the content exceeds 95% by weight, the formation of image by laser exposure may not be sufficiently performed in some cases.
  • The image-forming layer may contain other constituting components, if desired, in addition to the binder polymer described above as long as the effects of the invention are not damaged. Examples of the constituting component other than the binder polymer include various additives, for example, the polymerizable compound, sensitizing dye and polymerization initiator as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor and the heat fusible fine particle, light-to-heat converting agent, hydrophilic polymer, inorganic fine particle, surfactant, coloring agent and plasticizer as described with respect to the photosensitive layer of the heat fusion type lithographic printing plate precursor.
  • An overcoat layer can be provided on the image-forming layer of the polarity conversion type lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention for protecting the surface of image-forming layer from contamination due to a lipophilic substance during the preservation or finger mark contamination due to touch with finger at the handling.
  • As the overcoat layer, a layer same as the protective layer described for the radical polymerization type lithographic printing plate precursor can be used.
  • It is believed that in the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention, by using the support having a surface, a contact angle value of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more, the adhesion property between the photosensitive layer and the interface of the support is increased so that high printing durability is achieved. On the other hand, in the non-image area after removing the photosensitive layer, the surface of support is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 to decrease the contact angle value of water droplet in air on the surface of support to 30° or less so that the lithographic printing plate prepared has good stain resistance in the non-image area at printing.
  • [Method of preparing lithographic printing plate]
  • The method of preparing a lithographic printing plate according to the invention is described below. The method of preparing a lithographic printing plate according to the invention mainly comprises exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor, if desired, heating the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor, and treating the lithographic printing plate precursor with an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10. As to the embodiment of supplying the aqueous solution, for example, to supply as a developer or to supply as dampening water is exemplified. The component of the aqueous solution can be appropriately adjusted depending on the embodiment of supplying the aqueous solution. According to the treatment with the aqueous solution, the compound having a functional group X is decomposed to convert a compound having a functional group Y and as a result, the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support can be decreased to 30° or less. The contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of support after the treatment is preferably 25° or less, more preferably 20° or less.
  • The developer for use in the invention is an aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10. It is preferably, for example, water alone or an aqueous solution containing water as a main component (containing 60% by weight or more of water). Particularly, an aqueous solution having the composition similar to that of conventionally known dampening water, an aqueous solution containing a surfactant (for example, an anionic, nonionic, cationic or betaine surfactant) and an aqueous solution containing a water-soluble polymer compound, an inorganic acid and an inorganic acid salt or an organic acid and an organic acid salt are preferable. An aqueous solution containing both a surfactant and a water-soluble polymer compound is especially preferable. The pH of the developer is more preferably from 2 to 7, still more preferably from 2 to 6, particularly preferably from 2 to 5.
  • The anionic surfactant for use in the invention includes, for example, fatty acid salts, abietic acid salts, hydroxyalkanesulfonic acid salts, alkanesulfonic acid salts, dialkylsulfosuccinic acid salts, straight-chain alkylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, branched alkylbenzenesulfonic acid salts, alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts, alkylphenoxypolyoxy ethylene propylsulfonic acid salts, polyoxyethylene alkylsulfophenyl ether salts, N-methyl-N-oleyltaurine sodium salt, N-alkylsulfosuccinic acid monoamide disodium salts, petroleum sulfonic acid salts, sulfated castor oil, sulfated beef tallow oil, sulfate ester slats of fatty acid alkyl ester, alkyl sulfate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether sulfate ester salts, fatty acid monoglyceride sulfate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether sulfate ester salts, polyoxyethylene styryl phenyl ether sulfate ester salts, alkyl phosphate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether phosphate ester salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether phosphate ester salts, partially saponified products of styrene-maleic anhydride copolymer, partially saponified products of olefin-maleic anhydride copolymer and naphthalene sulfinate formalin condensates. Of the compounds, diatkylsulfosuccinic acid salts, alkyl sulfate ester salts and alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts are particularly preferably used.
  • The cationic surfactant for use in the invention is not particularly limited and conventionally known cationic surfactants can be used. Examples of the cationic surfactant include alkylamine salts, quaternary ammonium salts, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine salts and polyethylene polyamine derivatives.
  • The nonionic surfactant for use in the invention includes, for example, polyethylene glycol type higher alcohol ethylene oxide addacts, alkylphenol ethylene oxide addacts, fatty acid ethylene oxide addacts, polyhydric alcohol fatty acid ester ethylene oxide addacts, higher alkylamine ethylene oxide addacts, fatty acid amide ethylene oxide addacts, ethylene oxide addacts of fat, polypropylene glycol ethylene oxide addacts, dimethylsiloxane-ethylene oxide block copolymers, dimethylsiloxane-(propylene oxide-ethylene oxide) block copolymers, fatty acid esters of polyhydric alcohol type glycerol, fatty acid esters of pentaerythritol, fatty acid esters of sorbitol and sorbitan, fatty acid esters of sucrose, alkyl ethers of polyhydric alcohols and fatty acid amides of alkanolamines.
  • In the invention, ethylene oxide addacts of sorbitol and/or sorbitan fatty acid esters, polypropylene glycol ethylene oxide addacts, dimethylsiloxane-ethylene oxide block copolymers, dimethylsiloxane-(propylene oxide-ethylene oxide) block copolymers and fatty acid esters of polyhydric alcohols are more preferable.
  • Further, from the standpoint of stable solubility in water or opacity, with respect to the nonionic surfactant used in the developer according to the invention, the HLB (hydrophile-lipophile balance) value thereof is preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more.
  • Furthermore, an oxyethylene adduct of acetylene glycol type or acetylene alcohol type or a surfactant, for example, a fluorine-based surfactant or a silicon-based surfactant can also be used.
  • The betaine surfactant for use in the invention is not particularly restricted and conventionally known betaine surfactants may be used. For example, carboxy betaines, sulfobetaines and phosphobetaine are exemplified.
  • Of the surfactants for use in the developer, the nonionic surfactant or the betaine surfactant is particularly preferable.
  • The content of the surfactant for use in the developer according to the invention is preferably from 0.01 to 30% by weight, more preferably from 0.1 to 20% by weight, particularly preferably from 1 to 15% by weight.
  • The water-soluble polymer compound for use in the developer according to the invention includes, for example, soybean polysaccharide, modified starch, gum arabic, dextrin, a cellulose derivative (for example, carboxymethyl cellulose, carboxyethyl cellulose or methyl cellulose) or a modified product thereof, pllulan, polyvinyl alcohol or a derivative thereof, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylamide, an acrylamide copolymer, a vinyl methyl ether/maleic anhydride copolymer, a vinyl acetate/maleic anhydride copolymer and a styrene/maleic anhydride copolymer.
  • As the soybean polysaccharide, those known can be used. For example, as a commercial product, Soyafive (trade name, produced by Fuji Oil Co., Ltd.) is available and various grade products can be used. The soybean polysaccharide preferably used has viscosity in a range from 10 to 100 mPa/sec in a 10% by weight aqueous solution thereof.
  • As the modified starch, known modified starch can be used. The modified starch can be prepared, for example, by a method wherein starch, for example, of corn, potato, tapioca, rice or wheat is decomposed, for example, with an acid or an enzyme to an extent that the number of glucose residue per molecule is from 5 to 30 and then oxypropylene is added thereto in an alkali.
  • Two or more of the water-soluble polymer compounds may be used in combination. The content of the water-soluble polymer compound in the developer is preferably from 0.1 to 20% by weight, more preferably from 0.5 to 10% by weight.
  • The developer according to the invention may also contain an organic solvent. The organic solvent that can be contained in the developer include, for example, an aliphatic hydrocarbon (e.g., hexane, heptane, Isopar E, Isopar H, Isopar G (produced by Esso Chemical Co., Ltd.), gasoline or kerosene), an aromatic hydrocarbon (e.g., toluene or xylene), a halogenated hydrocarbon (methylene dichloride, ethylene dichloride, trichlene or monochlorobenzene) and a polar solvent.
  • Examples of the polar solvent include an alcohol (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 2-ethyoxyethanol, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monohexyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, polypropylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monobenzyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether, methyl phenyl carbinol, n-amyl alcohol or methylamyl alcohol), a ketone (e.g., acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, ethyl butyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone or cyclohexanone), an ester (e.g., ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, amyl acetate, benzyl acetate, methyl lactate, butyl lactate, ethylene glycol monobutyl acetate, polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol acetate, diethyl phthalate or butyl levulinate) and others (e.g., triethyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, N-phenylethanolamine or N-phenyldiethanolamine).
  • When the organic solvent is insoluble in water, it may be employed by being solubilized in water using a surfactant or the like. In the case where the developer contains the organic solvent, the concentration of the organic solvent is desirably less than 40% by weight in view of safety and inflammability.
  • Further, it is preferred that to the developer for use in the invention is added an inorganic acid and an inorganic salt or an organic acid and an organic acid salt in order to facilitate the decomposition reaction of the polarity conversion compound having a functional group X provided on the support. As the inorganic acid and inorganic salt, for example, phosphoric acid, methaphosphoric acid, ammonium primary phosphate, ammonium secondary phosphate, sodium primary phosphate, sodium secondary phosphate, potassium primary phosphate, potassium secondary phosphate, sodium tripolyphosphate, potassium pyrophosphate, sodium hexamethaphosphate, magnesium nitrate, sodium nitrate, potassium nitrate, ammonium nitrate, sodium sulfate, potassium sulfate, ammonium sulfate, sodium sulfite, ammonium sulfite, sodium hydrogen sulfate, nickel sulfate, lithium nitrate, copper nitrate, iron nitrate and zinc nitrate are illustrated. As the organic acid, for example, citric acid, acetic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, salicylic acid, caprylic acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, lactic acid, levulinic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, xylenesulfonic acid, phytic acid and an organic phosphonic acid are illustrated. The organic acid may also be used in the form of a metal salt or an ammonium salt. The content of the inorganic acid and inorganic salt or the organic acid and organic acid salt in the developer is preferably from 0.1 to 10% by weight, more preferably from 0.5 to 9% by weight, particularly preferably from 1 to 9% by weight.
  • Into the developer, an antiseptic agent, a chelating agent, a defoaming agent, an organic acid or the like can be incorporated in addition to the above components.
  • As the antiseptic agent, for example, phenol or a derivative thereof, formalin, an imidazole derivative, sodium dehydroacetate, a 4-isothiazolin-3-one derivative, benzisotiazolin-3-one, a benzotriazole derivative, an amidine guanidine derivative, a quaternary ammonium salt, a pyridine derivative, a quinoline derivative, a guanidine derivative, diazine, a triazole derivative, oxazole, an oxazine derivative and a nitro bromo alcohol, e.g., 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, 1,1-dibromo-1-nitro-2-ethanol or 1,1-dibromo-1-nitro-2-propanol are preferably used.
  • As the chelating agent, for example, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, potassium salt thereof, sodium salt thereof; diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, potassium salt thereof, sodium salt thereof; triethylenetetraminehexaacetic acid, potassium salt thereof, sodium salt thereof; hydroxyethylethylenediaminetriacetic acid, potassium salt thereof, sodium salt thereof; nitrilotriacetic acid, sodium salt thereof; organic phosphonic acids, for example, 1-hydroxyethane-1,1-diphosphonic acid, potassium salt thereof, sodium salt thereof; aminotri(methylenephosphonic acid), potassium salt thereof, sodium salt thereof; and phophonoalkanetricarboxylic acids are illustrated. A salt of an organic amine is also effectively used in place of the sodium salt or potassium salt in the chelating agents.
  • As the defoaming agent, for example, a conventional silicone-based self-emulsifying type or emulsifying type defoaming agent, and a nonionic surfactant having HLB of 5 or less are used. The silicone defoaming agent is preferably used. Any of emulsifying dispersing type and solubilizing type can be used.
  • [Exposure]
  • The lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is preferably exposed imagewise with a laser having an oscillation wavelength of 350 to 1,200 nm.
    1. (1) An infrared laser can be used as the laser light source. The infrared laser used is not particularly restricted and suitably includes a solid laser or semiconductor laser emitting an infrared ray having a wavelength of 760 to 1,200 nm. The output of the infrared laser is preferably 100 mW or more. Further, in order to shorten the exposure time, it is preferred to use a multibeam laser device. The exposure time is preferably 20 microseconds per pixel or less. Also, the irradiation energy is preferably from 10 to 300 mJ/cm2.
    2. (2) A semiconductor laser of 405 nm or 830 mm, an FD-YAG laser or the like is also used as the laser light source. In recent years, a CTP system equipped with a semiconductor laser of 405 nm has become widespread in view of system cost and handling properties. For instance, the lithographic printing plate precursor is loaded in the inner drum exposure apparatus equipped with a light source having an oscillation wavelength in a range of 350 to 450 nm (wherein a light beam emitted from the light source is parallel divided into an ordinary beam and an extraordinary beam in an equal amount and these two beam spots are adjacently aligned with a partial overlap in the sub-scanning direction to form a spot shape of light beam) and is subjected to exposure with the spot shape of light beam to perform image recording.
  • The exposure apparatus for use in the invention may be any of an internal drum system, an external drum system and a flat bed system. Further, the highly accurate image can be recorded at high speed by simultaneously recording the image using a multibeam exposure system.
  • Moreover, the image-recording can be performed using an FM screen at the exposure of lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • [Heating]
  • According to the invention, the lithographic printing plate precursor exposed imagewise may be heated overall between the exposure and development, if desired. By the heating, the image-forming reaction in the photosensitive layer is accelerated to achieve advantages, for example, improvements in the sensitivity and printing durability and stabilization of the sensitivity.
  • In the case where the protective layer is provided on the photosensitive layer, it is also preferred to carry out a water washing treatment before the development processing.
  • [Plate making]
  • The lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention is exposed imagewise with a semiconductor laser or a solid laser as described above, if desired, heated the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor as described above, and then subjected to printing by supplying oily ink and an aqueous component without undergoing any development processing step. Specifically, for example, a method wherein the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed with a laser, heated the entire surface in an oven and then mounted on a printing machine to conduct printing without undergoing the development processing step or a method wherein the lithographic printing plate precursor is mounted on a printing machine, exposed with a laser on the printing machine, heated the entire surface on the printing machine and then subjected to printing without undergoing the development processing step is exemplified.
  • For instance, according to one embodiment of negative type lithographic printing plate precursor of on-machine development type, after the imagewise exposure of the lithographic printing plate precursor with a laser, when the aqueous component and oily ink are supplied to conduct printing without undergoing the development processing step, for example, a wet development processing step, in the exposed area of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer cured by the exposure forms the oily ink receptive area having the oleophilic surface. On the other hand, in the unexposed area, the uncured photosensitive layer is removed by dissolution or dispersion with the aqueous component and/or oily ink supplied to reveal the surface of support in the area. By the contact of the aqueous component to the revealed surface of support, the decrease in the contact angle according to the invention occurs and as a result, the aqueous component adheres on the revealed surface of support and the oily ink adheres to the exposed area of the photosensitive layer, whereby printing is initiated. While either the aqueous component or oily ink may be supplied at first on the surface of lithographic printing plate precursor, it is preferred to supply the oily ink at first in view of preventing the aqueous component from contamination with the unexposed area of the photosensitive layer. For the aqueous component, dampening water for conventional lithographic printing or a solution prepared by adding a surfactant, a hydrophilic polymer compound, an inorganic acid and an inorganic acid salt or an organic acid and an organic acid salt to dampening water for conventional lithographic printing is employed. For the oily ink, printing ink for conventional lithographic printing is used.
  • Thus, the lithographic printing plate precursor is subjected to the on-machine development on a printing machine and used as it is for printing a large number of sheets.
  • In accordance with another embodiment of the plate making method of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention, the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed imagewise with a laser, if desired, heated the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor as described above, and then rubbed a surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with a rubbing member in the presence of the developer having pH of 2 to 10 described above in an automatic processor equipped with the rubbing member to remove the unexposed area of the photosensitive layer, thereby preparing a lithographic printing plate.
  • Further, according to still another embodiment of the plate making method of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention, the lithographic printing plate precursor is exposed imagewise with a laser, if desired, heated the entire surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor as described above, rubbed a surface of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with a rubbing member in the presence of the developer having pH of 2 to 10 described above in an automatic processor equipped with the rubbing member to remove the unexposed area of the photosensitive layer, and then another aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as a "hydrophilizing aqueous solution") is brought into contact with the surface of support revealed by a method, for example, immersion, spray or coating to prepare a lithographic printing plate. By conducting such a treatment, the contact angle of the surface of support in the unexposed area can be further reduced and the stain resistance is further improved.
  • The developer described above can be used as a developer and a development replenisher for the exposed negative type lithographic printing plate precursor and it is preferably applied to an automatic processor described hereinafter. In the case of conducting the development processing using an automatic processor, the developer becomes fatigued in accordance with the processing amount, and hence the processing ability may be restored using a replenisher or a fresh developer. Such a replenishment system can be preferably applied to the plate making method of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention.
  • The development processing using the aqueous solution having pH of 2 to 10 according to the invention is preferably performed by an automatic processor equipped with a supplying means for a developer and a rubbing member. As the automatic processor, there are illustrated an automatic processor in which a lithographic printing plate precursor after image exposure is subjected to a rubbing treatment while it is transporting described in JP-A-2-220061 and JP-A-60-59351 , and an automatic processor in which a lithographic printing plate precursor after image-recording placed on a cylinder is subjected to a rubbing treatment while rotating the cylinder described in U.S. Patents 5,148,746 and 5,568,768 and British Patent 2,297,719 . Among them, the automatic processor using a rotating brush roll as the rubbing member is particularly preferred.
  • The rotating brush roller which can be preferably used in the invention can be appropriately selected by taking account, for example, of scratch resistance of the image area and nerve strength of the support of the lithographic printing plate precursor. As for the rotating brush roller, a known rotating brush roller produced by implanting a brush material in a plastic or metal roller can be used. For example, a rotating brush roller described in JP-A-58-159533 and JP-A-3-100554 , or a brush roller described in JP-U-B-62-167253 (the term "JP-UM-B" as used herein means an "examined Japanese utility model publication"), in which a metal or plastic groove-type member having implanted therein in rows a brush material is closely radially wound around a plastic or metal roller acting as a core, can be used.
  • As the brush material, a plastic fiber (for example, a polyester-based synthetic fiber, e.g., polyethylene terephthalate or polybutylene terephthalate; a polyamide-based synthetic fiber, e.g., nylon 6.6 or nylon 6.10; a polyacrylic synthetic fiber, e.g., polyacrylonitrile or polyalkyl (meth)acrylate; and a polyolefin-based synthetic fiber, e.g., polypropylene or polystyrene) can be used. For instance, a brush material having a fiber bristle diameter of 20 to 400 µm and a bristle length of 5 to 30 mm can be preferably used.
  • The outer diameter of the rotating brush roller is preferably from 30 to 200 mm, and the peripheral velocity at the tip of the brush rubbing the plate surface is preferably from 0.1 to 5 m/sec.
  • It is preferred to use a plurality, that is, two or more of the rotating brush rollers.
  • The rotary direction of the rotating brush roller for use in the invention may be the same direction or the opposite direction with respect to the transporting direction of the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention, but when two or more rotating brush rollers are used in an automatic processor as shown in Fig. 2, it is preferred that at least one rotating brush roller rotates in the same direction and at least one rotating brush roller rotates in the opposite direction with respect to the transporting direction. By such arrangement, the photosensitive layer in the non-image area can be more steadily removed. Further, a technique of rocking the rotating brush roller in the rotation axis direction of the brush roller is also effective.
  • The developer can be used at an appropriate temperature, and is preferably used from 10 to 50°C.
  • In the invention, the lithographic printing plate after the rubbing treatment may be subsequently subjected to water washing, a drying treatment and an oil-desensitization treatment, if desired. In the oil-desensitization treatment, a known oil-desensitizing solution can be used.
  • Further, in a plate making method of the lithographic printing plate precursor to prepare a lithographic printing plate according to the invention, the entire surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor may be heated, if desired, before or during the exposure or between the exposure and the development. By the heating, the image-forming reaction in the photosensitive layer is accelerated and advantages, for example, improvement in the sensitivity and printing durability and stabilization of the sensitivity are achieved. For the purpose of increasing the image strength and printing durability, it is also effective to perform entire after-heating or entire exposure of the image after the development. Ordinarily, the heating before the development is preferably performed under a mild condition of 150°C or lower. When the temperature is too high, a problem may arise in that undesirable fog occurs in the non-image area. On the other hand, the heating after the development can be performed using a very strong condition. Ordinarily, the heat treatment is carried out in a temperature range of 150 to 350°C. When the temperature is too low, a sufficient effect of strengthening the image may not be obtained, whereas when it is excessively high, problems of deterioration of the support and thermal decomposition of the image area may occur.
  • The conditions of the heat treatment before the development can be appropriately determined in a range for providing the effects described above. Examples of the heating means include a conventional convection oven, an IR irradiation apparatus, an IR laser, a microwave apparatus or a Wisconsin oven. Specifically, the heat treatment can be conducted by maintaining the printing plate precursor at a plate surface temperature ranging from 70 to 150°C for a period of one second to 5 minutes, preferably at 80 to 140°C for 5 seconds to one minute, more preferably at 90 to 130°C for 10 to 30 seconds. In the above-described range, the effects described above are efficiently achieved and an adverse affect, for example, the occurrence of fog in the non-image area due to the heat can be preferably avoided.
  • According to the invention, the development processing step is conducted after the exposure step, preferably after the exposure step and the heat treatment step to prepare a lithographic printing plate. It is preferable that a plate setter used in the exposure step, a heat treatment means used in the heat treatment step and a development apparatus used in the development processing step are connected with each other and the lithographic printing plate precursor is subjected to automatically continuous processing. Specifically, a plate making line wherein the plate setter and the development apparatus are connected with each other by transport means, for example, a conveyer is illustrated. Also, the heat treatment means may be placed between the plate setter and the development apparatus or the heat treatment means and the development apparatus may constitute a unit apparatus.
  • In case where the lithographic printing plate precursor used is apt to be influenced by surrounding light under a working environment, it is preferred that the plate making line is blinded by a filter, a cover or the like.
  • After the image formation as described above, the entire surface of lithographic printing plate may be exposed to active ray, for example, ultraviolet light to accelerate curing of the image area. As a light source for the entire surface exposure, for example, a carbon arc lamp, a mercury lamp, a gallium lamp, a metal halide lamp, a xenon lamp, a tungsten lamp or various laser beams are exemplified. In order to obtain sufficient printing durability, the amount of the entire surface exposure is preferably 10 mJ/cm2 or more, more preferably 100 mJ/cm2 or more.
  • Heating may be performed at the same time with the entire surface exposure. By performing the heating, further improvement in the printing durability is recognized. Examples of the heating means include a conventional convection oven, an IR irradiation apparatus, an IR laser, a microwave apparatus or a Wisconsin oven. The plate surface temperature at the heating is preferably from 30 to 150°C, more preferably from 35 to 130°C, still more preferably from 40 to 120°C.
  • Further, after the image formation as described above, the entire surface of lithographic printing plate may be heated at high temperature to accelerate curing of the image area. Examples of means for the entire surface heating include a conventional convection oven, an IR irradiation apparatus, an IR laser, a microwave apparatus or a Wisconsin oven. The plate surface temperature at the heating is preferably from 150 to 350°C, more preferably from 175 to 325°C, still more preferably from 200 to 300°C.
  • EXAMPLES
  • The present invention will be described in more detail with reference to the following examples, but the invention should not be construed as being limited thereto.
  • Examples 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3 (Preparation of Aluminum support 1)
  • An aluminum plate (material: JIS A1050) having a thickness of 0.3 mm was subjected to a degrease treatment with an aqueous 10% by weight sodium aluminate solution at 50°C for 30 seconds in order to remove rolling oil on the surface thereof. Thereafter, the aluminum plate surface was grained using three nylon brushes implanted with bundled bristles having a diameter of 0.3 mm and an aqueous suspension (specific gravity: 1.1 g/cm3) of pumice having a median diameter of 25 µm, and then thoroughly washed with water. The plate was etched by dipping it in an aqueous 25% by weight sodium hydroxide solution at 45°C for 9 seconds and after washing with water, dipped in an aqueous 20% by weight nitric acid solution at 60°C for 20 seconds, followed by washing with water. The etching amount of the grained surface was about 3 g/m2.
  • Subsequently, the aluminum plate was subjected to a continuous electrochemical surface roughening treatment using alternate current voltage of 60 Hz. The electrolytic solution used was an aqueous 1% by weight nitric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) at a liquid temperature of 50°C. The electrochemical surface roughening treatment was performed using a rectangular wave alternate current having a trapezoidal waveform such that the time TP necessary for the current value to reach the peak from zero was 0.8 msec and the duty ratio was 1:1, and disposing a carbon electrode as the counter electrode. The auxiliary anode used was a ferrite. The current density was 30 A/dm2 in terms of the peak value of current, and 5% of the current flowing from the power source was divided to the auxiliary anode. The quantity of electricity at the nitric acid electrolysis was 175 C/dm2 when the aluminum plate was serving as the anode. Then, the aluminum plate was washed with water by spraying.
  • Then, the aluminum plate was subjected to an electrochemical surface roughening treatment in the same manner as in the nitric acid electrolysis above using, as the electrolytic solution, an aqueous 0.5% by weight hydrochloric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) at a liquid temperature of 50°C under the conditions that the quantity of electricity was 50 C/dm2 when the aluminum plate was serving as the anode, and then washed with water by spraying. The plate was then treated in an aqueous 15% by weight sulfuric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) as the electrolytic solution at a current density of 15 A/dm2 to provide a direct current anodic oxide film of 2.5 g/m2, thereafter washed with water and dried, thereby preparing Aluminum support 1.
  • The center line average roughness (Ra) of the thus-obtained aluminum support was measured using a stylus having a diameter of 2 µm and found to be 0.51 µm.
  • <Preparation of Supports 1 to 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor>
  • Each of Surface treatment solutions 1 to 5 having the composition shown below was coated on Aluminum support 1 obtained above and dried at 100°C for 3 minutes, The coating amount of the surface treatment layer was 10 mg/m2.
  • (Surface treatment solutions 1 to 5)
  • Polarity conversion compound shown in Table 1 below 0.50 g
    N-Methylpyrrolidone 49.00 g
    Methanol 450.00 g
    Water 1.50 g
  • The contact angle of water droplet in air of each of Supports I to 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor thus-obtained was measured according to the method described hereinbefore. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Each of Supports 1 to 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor was cut in size 3 cm x 3 cm, and immersed in 20 ml of each of Aqueous solutions 1 to 3 having the composition shown below adjusted pH of 3, 5 and 7, respectively, with phosphoric acid and sodium hydroxide at temperature of 25°C for one minute. Then, the support was washed with distilled water and dried at 100°C for one minute to obtain a support for lithographic printing plate precursor subjected to the hydrophilizing treatment.
  • (Aqueous solutions 1 to 3)
  • Water 100.00 g
    Benzyl alcohol 1.00 g
    Polyoxyethylene naphthyl ether (average number of 1.00 g
    oxyethylene: n = 13)
    Sodium salt of dioctylsulfosuccinic acid ester 0.50 g
    Ethylene glycol 0.50 g
    Ammonium primary phosphate 0.05 g
    Citric acid 0.05 g
  • The contact angle of water droplet in air of each of the supports for lithographic printing plate precursor thus-treated was measured according to the same method as described above. The results are shown in Table 1. TABLE 1
    Support for Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Polarity Conversion Compound Contact Angle of Water Droplet in Air (degrees) Contact Angle of Water Droplet in Air after Treatment (degree)
    Aqueous Solution 1 Aqueous Solution 2 Aqueous Solution 3
    pH= 7 pH=5 pH=3
    1 (1) 95 20 15 10
    2 (2) 90 21 15 11
    3 (3) 100 25 20 15
    4 (4) 90 19 14 10
    5 (5) 100 100 99 99
  • The polarity conversion compounds described in Table 1 are shown below. The numeral number means a molar ratio of the polymer component. The weight average molecular weights of Polarity Conversion Compounds (1) to (5) are shown below.
    Polarity Conversion Compound (1): 80,000
    Polarity Conversion Compound (2): 100,000
    Polarity Conversion Compound (3): 60,000
    Polarity Conversion Compound (4): 90,000
    Polarity Conversion Compound (5): 90,000
    Figure imgb0120
    Figure imgb0121
    Figure imgb0122
    Figure imgb0123
    Figure imgb0124
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 1, when the polarity conversion compound according to the invention is used, a large change in the contact angle is achieved. Specifically, with respect to the support for lithographic printing plate precursor (having the compound having the functional group X on its surface) according to the invention, the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface is decreased from 70° or more to 30° or less by the treatment with any of the aqueous solutions having pH of 3, 5 and 7. On the contrary, as to Support 5 not having the compound having the functional group X on its surface, the contact angle of water droplet in air is substantially not decreased by the treatment with any of the aqueous solutions having pH of 3, 5 and 7, although the support itself exhibits the contact angle of water droplet in air of 70° or more.
  • <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5>
  • Coating solution 1 for photosensitive layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of the supports for lithographic printing plate precursor described above and dried at 80°C for one minute. The coating amount of the photosensitive layer formed was 1.2 g/m2.
  • (Coating solution 1 for photosensitive layer)
  • Binder Polymer (1) (weight average molecular weight: 100,000) shown below 0.54 g
    Polymerizable Compound (1) 0.48 g
    Isocyanuric acid EO-modified triacrylate (Aronics M-315, produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.)
    Sensitizing Dye (1) shown below 0.06 g
    Polymerization Initiator (1) shown below 0.10 g
    Co-sensitizer (1) shown below 0.07 g
    Dispersion of ε-phthalocyanine pigment 0.40 g
    [pigment: 15 parts by weight; dispersing agent (allyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid (80/20) copolymer): 10 parts by weight; solvent (cyclohexanone/methoxypropyl acetate/1-methoxy-2-propanol = 15 parts by weight/20 parts by weight/40 parts by weight)]
    Methyl ethyl ketone 4.80 g
    Dimethylsulfoxide 4.80 g
    Figure imgb0125
    Figure imgb0126
    Figure imgb0127
    Figure imgb0128
  • Coating solution 1 for protective layer having the composition shown below was coated on the photosensitive layer using a bar so as to have a dry coating amount of 0.50 g/m2 and dried at 125°C for 70 seconds to form a protective layer, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5, respectively.
  • (Coating solution 1 for protective layer)
  • Polyvinyl alcohol (saponification degree: 98% by mole; polymerization degree: 500) 40 g
    Polyvinyl pyrrolidone (molecular weight: 50,000) 5 g
    Vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate (1/1) copolymer (molecular weight: 70,000) 0.5 g
    Surfactant (Emalex 710, produced by Nihon-Emulsion Co., Ltd.) 0.5 g
    Water 950 g
  • <Exposure, Development and Printing>
  • Each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5 was subjected to imagewise exposure using a semiconductor laser of 405 nm having an output of 100 mW with energy on the surface of plate of 90 µJ/cm2.
  • Then, development processing was performed in an automatic development processor having a structure shown in Fig. 2 using each of Developers 1 to 3 having the composition shown below adjusted pH to 3, 5 and 7, respectively, with hydrochloric acid and sodium hydroxide to prepare a lithographic printing plate (without heating). The automatic development processor had two rotating brush rollers. The first brush roller was a brush roller having an outer diameter of 90 mm and being implanted with fiber of polybutylene terephthalate (bristle diameter: 200 µm, bristle length: 17 mm), and the brush roller was rotated at 200 rpm (peripheral velocity at the tip of brush: 0.94 m/sec) in the same direction as the transporting direction. The second brush roller was a brush roller having an outer diameter of 60 mm and being implanted with fiber of polybutylene terephthalate (bristle diameter: 200µm, bristle length: 17 mm), and the brush roller was rotated at 200 rpm (peripheral velocity at the tip of brush: 0.63 m/sec) in the opposite direction to the transporting direction. The transportation of the lithographic printing plate precursor was performed at transporting speed of 100 cm/min.
  • The developer was supplied on the surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor by showering from a spray pipe using a circulation pump. The tank volume for the developer was 10 liters.
  • (Developer)
  • Water 100.00 g
    Benzyl alcohol 1.00 g
    Polyoxyethylene naphthyl ether (average number of oxyethylene: n = 13) 1.00 g
    Sodium salt of dioctylsulfosuccinic acid ester 0.50 g
    Ethylene glycol 0.50 g
    Ammonium primary phosphate 0.05 g
    Citric acid 0.05 g
  • On the other hand, within 30 seconds after the laser imagewise exposure, the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor was put in an oven and heated the entire surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor by blowing hot air to maintain at 110°C for 15 seconds and then the development processing was performed within 30 seconds in the same manner as described above to prepare a lithographic printing plate (with heating).
  • Then, each of the lithographic printing plate (without heating) and the lithographic printing plate (with heating) was mounted on a printing machine (SOR-M, produced by Heidelberg) and printing was performed at a printing speed of 6,000 sheets per hour using dampening water (EU-3 (etching solution, produced by Fuji Film Co., Ltd.))/water/isopropyl alcohol = 1/89/10 (by volume ratio)) and TRANS-G(N) black ink (produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.).
  • <Evaluation>
  • With respect to the lithographic printing plates prepared above, the printing durability and stain resistance were evaluated in the following manner. The results are shown in Table 2.
  • <Printing durability>
  • As increase in the number of printing sheets according to the printing as described above, the photosensitive layer was gradually abraded to cause decrease in the ink receptivity, resulting in decrease of ink density on a printed material. With respect to the lithographic printing plate obtained by the exposure in the same exposure amount (energy density), a number of printed materials obtained until the ink density (reflection density) decreased by 0.1 from that at the initiation of printing was determined to relatively evaluate the printing durability. Specifically, the printing durability was calculated according to the formula shown below using the comparative example referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 2 as the criterion (100). As the value increases, the printing durability becomes higher. Printing durability = Number of printed materials of subject litographic printing plate / Number of printed materials of criterion litographic printing plate × 100
    Figure imgb0129
  • <Stain resistance>
  • The 500th sheet of the printed material from the initiation of printing was picked up and the density of ink adhered on the non-image area was measured to relatively evaluate the stain resistance. Specifically, the stain resistance was calculated according to the formula shown below using the comparative examples referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 2 as the criterion (100). As the value increases, the density of ink adhered on the non-image area decreases, that is, the stain resistance becomes better. Stain resistance = Ink density of non - image area on printed material of criterion lithographie printing plate / Ink density of non - image area on printed material of subject lithographie printing plate × 100
    Figure imgb0130
    TABLE 2
    Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support pH of Developer Printing Durability Stain Resistance Evaluation Criterion
    Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating
    Example 1 1 1 7 100 100 1,300 1,300
    Example 2 5 100 100 1,400 1,400
    Example 3 3 100 100 1,500 1,500
    Example 4 2 2 7 100 100 1,200 1,200
    Example 5 5 100 100 1,300 1,300
    Example 6 3 100 100 1,400 1,400
    Example 7 3 3 7 120 120 1,100 1,100
    Example 8 5 120 120 1,200 1,200
    Example 9 3 120 120 1,300 1,300
    Example 10 4 4 7 120 120 1,300 1,300
    Example 11 5 120 120 1,400 1,400
    Example 12 3 120 120 1,500 1,500
    Comparative Example 1 5 5 7 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
    Comparative Example 2 5 100 100 100 100
    Comparative Example 3 3 100 100 100 100
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 2, the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance by the simple processing.
  • Examples 13 to 24 and Comparative Examples 4 to 6 <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 6 to 10>
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 6 to 10 were prepared in the same manner as in Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 1 to 5 except for changing Coating solution I for photosensitive layer to Coating solution 2 for photosensitive layer shown below and changing Coating solution 1 for protective layer to Coating solution 2 for protective layer shown below, respectively.
  • (Coating solution 2 for photosensitive layer)
  • Binder Polymer (2) (weight average molecular weight: 70,000) shown below 0.54 g
    Polymerizable Compound (2) shown below 0.48 g
    Sensitizing Dye (1) shown above 0.06 g
    Polymerization Initiator (1) shown above 0.18 g
    Co-sensitizer (1) shown above 0.07 g
    Dispersion of ε-phthalocyanine pigment [pigment: 15 parts by weight; dispersing agent (allyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid (80/20) copolymer): 10 parts by weight; solvent (cyclohexanone/methoxypropyl acetate/1-methoxy-2-propanol = 15 parts by weight/20 parts by weight/40 parts by weight)] 0.40 g
    Thermal polymerization inhibitor N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt 0.01 g
    Fluorine-Based Surfactant (1) (weight average molecular weight: 11,000) shown below 0.001 g
    Polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene condensate 0.04 g
    (Pluronic L44, produced by ADEKA Corp.)
    Tetraethylamine hydrochloride 0.01 g
    1-Methoxy-2-propanol 3.5 g
    Methyl ethyl ketone 8.0 g
    Figure imgb0131
    Figure imgb0132
    Figure imgb0133
  • (Coating solution 2 for protective layer)
  • Dispersion of Mica (1) shown below 13.00 g
    Polyvinyl alcohol (saponification degree: 98% by mole; polymerization degree: 500) 1.30 g
    Sodium 2-ethylhexylsulfosuccinate 0.20 g
    Vinyl pyrrolidone/vinyl acetate (1/1) copolymer (molecular weight: 70,000) 0.05 g
    Surfactant (Emalex 710, produced by Nihon-Emulsion Co., Ltd.) 0.05 g
    Water 133.00 g
  • (Preparation of Dispersion of Mica (I))
  • In 368 g of water was added 32 g of synthetic mica (SOMASIF ME-100, produced by CO-OP Chemical Co., Ltd.; aspect ratio: 1,000 or more) and the mixture was dispersed using a homogenizer until the average particle diameter (measured by a laser scattering method) became 0.5 µm to obtain Dispersion of Mica (1).
  • Lithographic printing plate precursors 6 to 10 thus-obtained were subjected to the exposure, development and printing in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 12 using Developers 1 to 3 used in the development processing of Examples 1 to 12 and evaluated in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 12. The results are shown in Table 3. As the criterion (100) for the relative evaluation, the comparative example referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 3 was used. TABLE 3
    Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support pH of Developer Printing Durability Stain Resistance Evaluation Criterion
    Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating
    Example 13 6 1 7 100 100 1,300 1,300
    Example 14 5 100 100 1,400 1,400
    Example 15 3 100 100 1,500 1,500
    Example 16 7 2 7 100 100 1,200 1,200
    Example 17 5 100 100 1,300 1,300
    Example 18 3 100 100 1,400 1,400
    Example 19 8 3 7 120 120 1,100 1,100
    Example 20 5 120 120 1,200 1,200
    Example 21 3 120 120 1,300 1,300
    Example 22 9 4 7 120 120 1,300 1,300
    Example 23 5 120 120 1,400 1,400
    Example 24 3 120 120 1,500 1,500
    Comparative Example 4 10 5 7 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
    Comparative Example 5 5 100 100 100 100
    Comparative Example 6 3 100 100 100 100
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 3, the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance by the simple processing.
  • Examples 25 to 28 and Comparative Example 7 (Preparation of Aluminum support 2)
  • An aluminum plate (material: JIS A1050) having a thickness of 0.3 mm was subjected to surface treatment by performing processes (a) to (k) shown below in this order.
  • (a) Mechanical surface roughening treatment
  • Mechanical surface roughening of the aluminum plate was conducted by means of rotating roller-form nylon brushes while supplying a suspension (having specific gravity of 1.12) of an abrasive (silica sand) in water as an abrasion slurry solution to the surface of the aluminum plate. The average particle size of the abrasive was 8 µm and the maximum particle size was 50 µm. The material of the nylon brush was 6.10 nylon, and the brush has a bristle length of 50 mm and a bristle diameter of 0.3 mm. The nylon brush was made by making holes in a stainless steel cylinder having a diameter of 300 mm and densely filling the brush bristles. Three of the rotating nylon brushes were used. Two supporting rollers (each having a diameter of 200 mm) provided under the brush rollers were spaced 300 mm. The brush rollers were pressed against the aluminum plate till the load applied to a driving motor for rotating the brush became 7 kw greater than the load before pressing the brush rollers against the aluminum plate. The rotating direction of the brushes was the same as the moving direction of the aluminum plate. The rotation number of the brushes was 200 rpm.
  • (b) Alkali etching treatment
  • Etching treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (sodium hydroxide concentration: 26% by weight, aluminum ion concentration: 6.5% by weight) having temperature of 70°C to dissolve the aluminum plate in an amount of 6 g/m2, followed by washing by spraying well water.
  • (c) Desmut treatment
  • Desmut treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous 1% by weight nitric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) having temperature of 30°C, followed by washing with water by spraying. The aqueous nitric acid solution used for the desmut treatment was a waste solution of the electrolytic solution from the process of (d) described below.
  • (d) Electrochemical surface roughening treatment
  • Electrochemical surface roughening treatment of the aluminum plate was continuously conducted by applying 60 Hz alternating current voltage. The electrolytic solution used was an aqueous solution containing 10.5 g/liter of nitric acid (containing 5 g/liter of aluminum ion) and the solution temperature was 50°C. The electrochemical surface roughening treatment was conducted using an alternating current source, which provided a trapezoidal rectangular wave alternating current where time (TP) for reaching the current to its peak from zero was 0.8 msec and a duty ratio was 1:1, and using a carbon electrode as a counter electrode. A ferrite was used as an auxiliary anode. The electrolytic cell used was a radial cell type. The current density was 30 A/dm2 at the peak current, and the electric amount was 220 C/dm2 in terms of the total electric quantity during the aluminum plate functioning as an anode. To the auxiliary anode, 5% of the current from the electric source was divided. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • (e) Alkali etching treatment
  • Etching treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted at 32°C by spraying an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 26% by weight and an aluminum ion concentration of 6.5% by weight to dissolve the aluminum plate in an amount of 0.20 g/m2. Thus, the smut component mainly comprising aluminum hydroxide formed in the precedent process of (d) was removed and an edge portion of the pit formed was dissolved to smoothen the edge portion. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • (f) Desmut treatment
  • Desmut treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous 15% by weight nitric acid solution (containing 4.5% by weight of aluminum ion) having temperature of 30°C, followed by washing by spraying well water. The aqueous nitric acid solution used for the desmut treatment was a waste solution of the electrolytic solution from the process of (d) described above.
  • (g) Electrochemical surface roughening treatment
  • Electrochemical surface roughening treatment of the aluminum plate was continuously conducted by applying 60 Hz alternating current voltage. The electrolytic solution used was an aqueous solution containing 7.5 g/liter of hydrochloric acid (containing 5 g/liter of aluminum ion) and the solution temperature was 35°C. The electrochemical surface roughening treatment was conducted using an alternating current source which provided a rectangular wave alternating current and using a carbon electrode as a counter electrode. A ferrite was used as an auxiliary anode. The electrolytic cell used was a radial cell type. The current density was 25 A/dm2 at the peak current, and the electric amount was 50 C/dm2 in terms of the total electric quantity during the aluminum plate functioning as an anode. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • (h) Alkali etching treatment
  • Etching treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted at 32°C by spraying an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 26% by weight and an aluminum ion concentration of 6.5% by weight to dissolve the aluminum plate in an amount of 0.10 g/m2. Thus, the smut component mainly comprising aluminum hydroxide formed in the precedent process of (g) was removed and an edge portion of the pit formed was dissolved to smoothen the edge portion. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water.
  • (i) Desmut treatment
  • Desmut treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted by spraying an aqueous 25% by weight sulfuric acid solution (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) having temperature of 60°C, followed by washing by spraying well water.
  • (j) Anodizing treatment
  • Anodizing treatment of the aluminum plate was conducted using as an electrolytic solution, an aqueous solution having sulfuric acid concentration of 170 g/liter (containing 0.5% by weight of aluminum ion) at 43°C. The current density was about 30 A/dm2. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water. The amount of the final anodic oxide film was 2.7 g /m2.
  • (k) Alkali metal silicate treatment
  • Alkali metal silicate treatment (silicate treatment) of the aluminum plate was conducted by immersing the aluminum plate in an aqueous 1% by weight sodium silicate No. 3 solution having temperature of 30°C for 10 seconds. Subsequently, the plate was washed by spraying well water, whereby Aluminum support 2 was prepared. The adhesion amount of the silicate was 3.6 mg/m2.
  • <Preparation of Support 6-10 for lithographic printing plate precursor>
  • Surface Treatment Solution 4 having the composition shown below was coated on Aluminum support 2 obtained above and dried at 100°C for 3 minutes. The coating amount of the surface treatment layer was 7 mg/m2.
  • (Surface treatment solution 6)
  • Polarity conversion compound shown in Table 4 0.50 g
    N-Methylpyrrolidone 50.00 g
    Methanol 450.00 g
  • The contact angle of water droplet in air of each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor thus-obtained was measured according to the method described hereinbefore. The results are shown in Table 4,
  • Further, each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor was cut in size 3 cm x 3 cm, and immersed in 20 ml of Developer 2 shown below at 25°C for one minute. Then, the support was washed with distilled water and dried at 100°C for one minute to obtain a support for lithographic printing plate precursor subjected to the hydrophilizing treatment. The contact angle of water droplet in air of each of the supports for lithographic printing plate precursor thus-treated was measured according to the same method as described above. The results are shown in Table 4.
  • <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 15>
  • Coating solution 3 for photosensitive layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor using a bar and dried in an oven at 70°C for 60 seconds to form a photosensitive layer having a dry coating amount of 1.1 g/m2.
  • Coating solution 3 for photosensitive layer was prepared by mixing Photosensitive solution (1) shown below with Microcapsule solution (1) shown below just before coating.
  • Photosensitive solution (1)
  • Binder Polymer (3) (weight average molecular weight: 100,000) shown below 0.162 g
    Polymerization Initiator (2) shown below 0.160 g
    Polymerization Initiator (3) shown below 0.180 g
    Infrared Absorbing Agent (1) shown below 0.020 g
    Polymerizable compound (Aronics M-215, produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.) 0.385 g
    Fluorine-Based Surfactant (1) shown above 0.044 g
    Methyl ethyl ketone 1.091 g
    1-Methoxy-2-propanol 8.210 g
    Figure imgb0134
    Figure imgb0135
  • Microcapsule solution (1)
  • Microcapsule (1) prepared as shown below 2.640 g
    Water 2.425 g
  • Preparation of Microcapsule (1)
  • As an oil phase component, 10 g of adduct of trimethylolpropane and xylene diisocyanate (Takenate D-110N, produced by Mitsui Takeda Chemicals, Inc., 75% by weight ethyl acetate solution), 6.00 g of Aronics SR-399 (produced by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.) and 0.12 g of Pionin A-41C (produced by Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.) were dissolved in 16.67 g of ethyl acetate. As an aqueous phase component, 37.5 g of an aqueous 4% by weight PVA-205 solution was prepared. The oil phase component and the aqueous phase component were mixed and the mixture was emulsified using a homogenizer at 12,000 rpm for 10 minutes. The resulting emulsion was added to 25 g of distilled water and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes and then stirred at 40°C for 2 hours. The thus-obtained microcapsule solution was diluted with distilled water to have a solid content concentration of 15% by weight to prepare Microcapsule (1). The average particle diameter of the microcapsule was 0.2 µm.
  • Coating solution 3 for protective layer having the composition shown below was coated on the photosensitive layer using a bar and dried in an oven at 125°C for 75 seconds to form a protective layer having a dry coating amount of 0.15 g /m2, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 15, respectively.
  • (Coating solution 3 for protective layer)
  • Polyvinyl alcohol (aqueous 6% by weight solution) (PVA 105, produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd., saponification degree: 98.5% by mole; polymerization degree: 500) 2.24 g
    Polyvinyl pyrrolidone (K 30) (weight average molecular weight: 58,000) 0.0053 g
    Surfactant (aqueous 1% by weight solution) (Emalex 710, produced by Kao Corp.) 2.15 g
    Scale-like synthetic mica (aqueous 3.4% by weight dispersion)(MEB 3L, produced by UNICOO Co., Ltd., average particle size: 1 to 5 µm) 3.75 g
    Distilled water 10.60 g
  • (1) Exposure, Development and Printing
  • Each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 15 was exposed by Trendsetter 3244VX, produced by Creo Co., equipped with a water-cooled 40 W infrared semiconductor laser under the conditions of output of 9W, a rotational number of an outer surface drum of 210 rpm and resolution of 2,400 dpi.
  • Then, the development processing was performed using Developer 2 (pH = 4.5) shown below in the same manner as in Example 1 to prepare a lithographic printing plate (without heating).
  • (Developer 2)
  • Water 100,00 g
    Polyoxyethylene naphthyl ether (average number of oxyethylene: n = 13) 0.50 g
    Sodium salt of dioctylsulfosuccinic acid ester 0.50 g
    Ammonium primary phosphate 0.05 g
    Citric acid 0.05 g
  • On the other hand, within 30 seconds after the laser imagewise exposure, the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor was put in an oven and heated the entire surface of the lithographic printing plate precursor by blowing hot air to maintain at 110°C for 15 seconds and then the development processing was performed within 30 seconds in the same manner as described above to prepare a lithographic printing plate (with heating).
  • Then, using each of the lithographic printing plate (without heating) and the lithographic printing plate (with heating), the printing durability and stain resistance were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 4. As the criterion (100) for the relative evaluation, Comparative. Example 7 was used. TABLE 4
    Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support Contact Angle of Water Droplet in Air (degree) Printing Durability Stain Resistance
    Before Treatment After Treatment Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating
    Example 25 11 6 99 15 100 100 1,900 1,900
    Example 25 12 7 95 10 100 100 2,000 2,000
    Example 26 13 8 105 18 120 120 1,700 1,700
    Example 28 14 9 94 10 120 120 2,000 2,000
    Comparative Example 7 15 10 110 110 100 100 100 100
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 4, the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance by the simple processing.
  • Examples 29 to 36 and Comparative Examples 8 to 9 <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 16 to 20>
  • Coating solution 1 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor using a bar and dried in an oven at 100°C for 120 seconds to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1.1 g/m2, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 16 to 20.
  • (Coating solution 1 for image-forming layer)
  • Heat Decarboxylating Polymer (1) (weight average molecular weight: 50,000) shown below 1.0 g
    Infrared absorbing agent (NK-3508, produced by Nippon Kankosikiso Kenkyusho K.K.) 0.15 g
    Megafac F-177 (fluorine-based surfactant, produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.06 g
    Methyl ethyl ketone 20 g
    Methyl alcohol 7 g
    Figure imgb0136
  • <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 21 to 25>
  • Coating solution 2 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on each of Supports 6 to 10 for lithographic printing plate precursor using a bar and dried in an oven at 80°C for 180 seconds to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1.2 g/m2, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 21 to 25.
  • (Coating solution 2 for image-forming layer)
  • Heat-Sensitive Polymer Compound (1) (weight average molecular weight: 40,000) shown below 4.0 g
    Infrared absorbing agent (IR-125, produced by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 0.15 g
    Acid generator (diphenyliodonium anthraquinonesulfonate) 0.15 g
    Dye obtained by substituting counter ion of Victoria Pure Blue BOH with 1-naphthalenesulfonic acid 0.05 g
    Fluorine-based surfactant (Megafac F-177, produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.06 g
    Methyl ethyl ketone 20 g
    γ-Butyrolactone 10 g
    1-Methoxy-2-propanol 8 g
    Water 2 g
    Figure imgb0137
  • Using each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 16 to 25, the image exposure, development and printing were performed in the same manner as in Example 25 using Developer 2 described in Example 25 and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 25. The results are shown in Table 5. As the criterions (100) for the relative evaluation, the comparative examples referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 5 were used respectively. TABLE 5
    Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support Printing Durability Stain Resistance Evaluation Criterion
    Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating
    Example 29 16 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
    Example 30 17 7 100 100 2,000 2,000
    Example 31 18 8 120 120 1,700 1,700
    Example 32 19 9 120 120 2,000 2,000
    Comparative Example 8 20 10 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
    Example 33 21 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
    Example 34 22 7 100 100 2,000 2,000
    Example 35 23 8 120 120 1,700 1,700
    Example 36 24 9 120 120 2,000 2,000
    Comparative Example 9 25 10 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 5, the lithographic printing plate precursor having the polarity conversion type image-forming layer according to the invention can provide improved stain resistance while maintaining good printing durability.
  • Examples 37 to 48 and Comparative Examples 10 to 12
  • Each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 11 to 25 was exposed by Trendsetter 3244VX, produced by Creo Co., equipped with a water-cooled 40 W infrared semiconductor laser under the conditions of output of 9W, a rotational number of an outer surface drum of 210 rpm and resolution of 2,400 dpi. The exposed lithographic printing plate precursor was mounted without conducting development processing on a cylinder of a printing machine (SOR-M, produced by Heidelberg Co.). After supplying Dampening water (1) (pH = 4.5) having the composition shown below and TRANS-G(N) black ink (produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.), printing was performed at a printing speed of 6,000 sheets per hour. The printing durability and stain resistance were evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 6. As the criterions (100) for the relative evaluation, the comparative examples referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 6 were used respectively.
  • <Dampening water (1)>
  • EU-3 (etching solution, produced by Fuji Film Co., Ltd.) 1 part by weight
    Water 89 parts by weight
    Isopropyl alcohol 7 parts by weight
    TABLE 6
    Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support Printing Durability Stain Resistance Evaluation Criterion
    Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating
    Example 37 11 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
    Example 38 12 7 100 100 2,000 2,000
    Example 39 13 8 120 120 1,700 1,700
    Example 40 14 9 120 120 2,000 2,000
    Comparative Example 10 15 10 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
    Example 41 16 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
    Example 42 17 7 100 100 2,000 2,000
    Example 43 18 8 120 120 1,700 1,700
    Example 44 19 9 120 120 2,000 2,000
    Comparative Example 11 20 10 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
    Example 45 21 6 100 100 1,900 1,900
    Example 46 22 7 100 100 2,000 2,000
    Example 47 23 8 120 120 1,700 1,700
    Example 48 24 9 120 120 2,000 2,000
    Comparative Example 12 25 10 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 6, the lithographic printing plate precursor according to the invention can provide the lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance also by the simple processing (on-machine development).
  • Examples 49 to 52 and Comparative Examples 13 to 14 <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 26 to 28>
  • Coating solution 3 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on Supports 1, 2 and 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor and dried at 35°C for one hour to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1.3 g/m2, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 26 to 28, respectively.
  • (Coating solution 3 for image-forming layer)
  • To 11.25 g of a 10% dispersion of polymethyl methacrylate particle (average particle size: 90 nm) stabilized with Hostapal B (1% based on the polymer) in deionized water were successively added 5.83 g of a 15% dispersion of carbon black in water, 57.92 g of water and 25 g of a 2% aqueous solution of 98% hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate (weight average molecular weight: 200,000) to prepare Coating solution 3 for image-forming layer.
  • <Preparation of Lithographic printing plate precursors 29 to 31>
  • Coating solution 4 for image-forming layer having the composition shown below was coated on Supports 1, 2 and 5 for lithographic printing plate precursor and dried at 60°C for 2 minutes to form an image-forming layer having a dry coating amount of 1,3 g/m2, thereby preparing Lithographic printing plate precursors 29 to 31, respectively.
  • (Coating solution 4 for image-forming layer)
  • Water 30 g
    Dispersion of novolac resin fine particle shown below 11.8 g
    Tricresyl phosphate 0.1 g
    Megafac F-171 (fluorine-based surfactant, produced by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.) 0.1 g
  • (Preparation of Dispersion of novolac resin fine particle)
  • To 12.0 g of ethyl acetate and 6.0 g of methyl ethyl ketone were dissolved 6.0 g of phenol novolac resin (metha/para ratio: 60/40) having a weight average molecular weight of 1,500, 1.5 g of light-to-heat converting agent (IR-26) shown below and 0.1 g of anionic surfactant (Pionin A-41C, produced by Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.) to prepare an oil phase component. To the oil phase component was added as an aqueous phase component, 36.0 g of an aqueous 4% by weight polyvinyl alcohol (PVA-205, produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd.) solution and the mixture was emulsified using a homogenizer at 15,000 rpm for 15 minutes. After adding 24.0 g of water, the emulsion was heated at 40°C for 3 hours to remove the organic solvent. The solid content concentration of the resulting dispersion of novolac resin fine particle was measured and found to be 13.0% by weight. The average particle diameter of the novolac resin fine particle was 0.25 µm.
    Figure imgb0138
  • <Exposure, Development and Printing>
  • Each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 26 to 28 was exposed by a scanning NdYLF infrared laser emitting at 1,050 nm (on the surface of the image-forming layer, scanning speed: 4 m/sec, spot size: 15 µm and output: 170 mW). On the other hand, each of Lithographic printing plate precursors 29 to 31 was exposed by Trendsetter 3244VFS, produced by Creo Co., equipped with a water-cooled 40 W infrared semiconductor laser under the conditions of output of 9W, a rotational number of an outer surface drum of 210 rpm, energy on the surface of plate of 100 mJ/cm2 and resolution of 2,400 dpi.
  • Then, each of the exposed lithographic printing plate precursors was subjected to the development and printing in the same manner as in Example 1 except for using Developer 4 (pH = 4.5) having the composition shown below as shown in Table 7 and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 7. As the criterions (100) for the relative evaluation, the comparative examples referred to as "Evaluation Criterion" in Table 7 were used respectively.
  • (Developer 4)
  • Water 100.00 g
    Polyoxyethylene naphthyl ether (average number of oxyethylene: n = 13) 0.50 g
    Sodium salt of dioctylsulfosuccinic acid ester 0.50 g
    Ammonium primary phosphate 0.05 g
    Citric acid 0.05 g
    TABLE 7
    Lithographic Printing Plate Precursor Support Printing Durability Stain Resistance Equation Criterion
    Without Heating With Heating Without Heating With Heating
    Example 49 26 1 100 100 1,300 1,300
    Example 50 27 2 100 100 1,200 1,200
    Comparative Example 13 28 5 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
    Example 51 29 1 100 100 1,300 1,300
    Example 52 31 2 100 100 1,200 1,200
    Comparative Example 14 31 5 100 100 100 100 Evaluation Criterion
  • As is apparent from the results shown in Table 7, the lithographic printing plate precursor having the heat fusion type image-forming layer according to the invention can provide a lithographic printing plate having both high printing durability and excellent stain resistance also by the simple processing.

Claims (11)

  1. A lithographic printing plate precursor comprising: a support having a surface, a contact angle of water droplet in air on which is 70° or more; and a photosensitive layer, wherein the support has a compound having a functional group X on a surface of the support, the functional group X is a functional group capable of being decomposed to convert to a functional group Y, when the functional group X is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of from 2 to 10, so as to decrease the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of the support to 30° or less.
  2. The lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in Claim 1, wherein the compound having a functional group X is a compound having a functional group represented by the following formula (1):
    Figure imgb0139
    wherein R1 to R3 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, -OR11, -SR11, -OCOR11, -OCOOR11, -OCONR11R12, -OSO2R11, -OPO(OR11)(OR12), -OSiR11R12R13, -OPO(OR11)R12, -SCOR11, -NR11R12, -NR11COR12, -NR11COOR12, -NR11CONR12R13, -NR11SO2R12, -COR11, -COOR11, -CONR11R12, -SiR11R12R13, -SO2R11, -SO3R11 or -PO(OR11)(OR12), or appropriate two of R1 to R3 may be combined with each other to form a ring, R1 I to R13 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group or an alkynyl, and * represents a bonding group to a mother skeleton of the compound.
  3. The lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in Claim 1 or 2, wherein the compound having a functional group X is a polymer compound.
  4. The lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 3, wherein the compound having a functional group X has an absorbing group to the support.
  5. The lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 4, wherein the photosensitive layer comprises a binder polymer having a hydrophilic group.
  6. The lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 5, wherein the photosensitive layer comprises a sensitizing dye having absorption in a wavelength range of from 350 to 1,200 nm.
  7. The Lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 6, which further comprises a protective layer so that the support, the photosensitive layer and the protective layer are provided in this order.
  8. A method for preparing a lithographic printing plate comprising: exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 7; and developing the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with an aqueous solution having pH of from 2 to 10 to form a non-image area, wherein at the developing, the lithographic printing plate precursor is treated with an aqueous solution having pH of from 2 to 10 to convert the functional group X to the functional group Y, so as to decrease the contact angle of water droplet in air on the surface of the support in the unexposed area to 30° or less.
  9. A method for preparing a lithographic printing plate comprising: exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 7 with a laser having an oscillation wavelength of from 350 to 1,200 nm; and developing the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor with an aqueous solution having pH of from 2 to 10 to remove the photosensitive layer in the unexposed area and to convert the functional group X to the functional group Y, so as to form a surface of an non-image area having a contact angle of water droplet in air of 30° or less.
  10. The method for preparing a lithographic printing plate as claimed in Claim 8 or 9, wherein the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor is subjected to heat treatment between the imagewise exposure and the developing.
  11. A lithographic printing method comprising: exposing imagewise the lithographic printing plate precursor as claimed in any one of Claims 1 to 7; mounting the exposed lithographic printing plate precursor on a printing machine without carrying out any treatment; and performing printing with printing ink and dampening water having pH of from 2 to 10.
EP08017055A 2007-09-28 2008-09-26 Lithographic printing plate precursor and method of preparing lithographic printing plate Withdrawn EP2042337A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2007256776 2007-09-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP2042337A1 true EP2042337A1 (en) 2009-04-01

Family

ID=40303643

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP08017055A Withdrawn EP2042337A1 (en) 2007-09-28 2008-09-26 Lithographic printing plate precursor and method of preparing lithographic printing plate

Country Status (2)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2042337A1 (en)
JP (1) JP5222678B2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2554394A4 (en) * 2010-03-26 2016-04-13 Fujifilm Corp Planographic printing master plate and production method therefor
EP3991983A4 (en) * 2019-06-28 2022-08-10 FUJIFILM Corporation Original plate for on-press development type lithographic printing plate, method for fabricating lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0869394A1 (en) 1997-04-03 1998-10-07 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Planographic original plate
EP0922570A2 (en) * 1997-12-10 1999-06-16 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Planographic printing plate precursor and a method for producing a planographic plate
EP1396756A2 (en) 2002-09-03 2004-03-10 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Planographic printing plate precursor
EP1695822A2 (en) 2005-02-28 2006-08-30 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Lithographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing method

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005271338A (en) * 2004-03-24 2005-10-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming method and lithographic printing method
JP4945103B2 (en) * 2004-08-24 2012-06-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing plate preparation method, planographic printing plate precursor, and planographic printing method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0869394A1 (en) 1997-04-03 1998-10-07 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Planographic original plate
EP0922570A2 (en) * 1997-12-10 1999-06-16 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Planographic printing plate precursor and a method for producing a planographic plate
EP1396756A2 (en) 2002-09-03 2004-03-10 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Planographic printing plate precursor
EP1695822A2 (en) 2005-02-28 2006-08-30 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Lithographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing method

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2554394A4 (en) * 2010-03-26 2016-04-13 Fujifilm Corp Planographic printing master plate and production method therefor
EP3991983A4 (en) * 2019-06-28 2022-08-10 FUJIFILM Corporation Original plate for on-press development type lithographic printing plate, method for fabricating lithographic printing plate, and lithographic printing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5222678B2 (en) 2013-06-26
JP2009098670A (en) 2009-05-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2006738B1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor
EP2042312B1 (en) Processing method of lithographic printing plate precursor
US8221959B2 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and method for preparation of lithographic printing plate
EP1975710B1 (en) Plate-making method of lithographic printing plate precursor
JP4792367B2 (en) Preparation of lithographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing plate
EP1939687B1 (en) Polymerizable composition and lithographic printing plate precursor
JP2007249036A (en) Lithographic printing original plate and lithographic printing method
JP5271524B2 (en) Planographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing plate preparation method
EP2045662B1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and method of preparing lithographic printing plate
US7811742B2 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor
US8151705B2 (en) Method of preparing lithographic printing plate
JP2007249037A (en) Lithographic printing original plate and lithographic printing method
EP1974914B1 (en) Method of preparing lithographic printing plate
EP2105800B1 (en) Processing solution for preparing lithographic printing plate and processing method of lithographic printing plate precursor
US7985535B2 (en) Image-forming method and lithographic printing plate precursor
EP2042311A1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor, method of preparing lithographic printing plate and lithographic printing method
EP2090933A1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and printing method
EP2042337A1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and method of preparing lithographic printing plate

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Extension state: AL BA MK RS

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20091001

AKX Designation fees paid

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN

18W Application withdrawn

Effective date: 20141203